NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
INSTRUCTIONS
VR-N1600U
VR-N1600E
VR-N900U
WARNING
VR-N1600U/E (A)
VR-N900U (B)
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
ꢁꢇ
LIVE/BROWSE
ALARM
OPERATE
REV
FWD
HDD
SELECT
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
SERIAL
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
VR-N1600U/E
VR-N900U
Powered by Milestone
Please read the following before getting started:
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.
Before operating this unit, please read the instructions
carefully to ensure the best possible performance.
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the
body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
VR-N1600U/VR-N900U
LST0728-001C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (for USA)
Please use this unit in an appropriate power source.
Veuillez employer cette unité dans une source d'énergie
appropriée.
(VR-N900U)
II
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please use this unit in an appropriate power source.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN MOUNTING RACK
CAUTION
● Do not install the VR-N1600U/E/VR-N900U to the rack in places where ambient temperature becomes 40˚C or more.
● When rack mounting, keep the internal temperature of rack assembly 40˚C or less.
● When using rack mount, keep the clearance between the rack and the rear of unit 150mm or more.
● When installing this unit or the like to the rack, refer to the consumption current value of the nameplate of each
device so that the current capacity (including rated capacity of power supply wire) of the rack is not exceeded.
● Use the rack that meets the following requirements:
• must be equipped with overcurrent protection
• must be equipped with protective earthing conductor power plug and socket
To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack, you must take special precautions to ensure that the system
remains stable.
The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety:
This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack.
When mounting this unit in a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom
of the rack.
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack.
CAUTION
Before you mount this device in a rack, make sure that the rack is secure and in no danger of tipping over.
III
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil num rique de la Class A est
,
WARNING (FOR EUROPE):
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
case the user may be required to take
cause radio interference in which
adequate measures.
IV
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN (for Germany)
Benutzen Sie bitte diese Maßeinheit in einer passenden
Energiequelle.
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VI
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN (for Germany)
VII
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E/VR-N900U
1600E/VR-N900U
E/VR-N900U.
1600E/VR-N900U
E/VR-N900U
E/VR-N900U
VIII
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Features
Supports RAID1 (VR-N1600U/E)
Adding a built-in HDD enables support for RAID1.
RAID1 writes the same data to two hard disks simultaneously (mirroring), so
that one of them remains usable when the other breaks down.
Simultaneous recording up to 16 channels at
160 ips (VR-N1600U/E)
Simultaneous recording up to 16 channels at 240 ips is possible
when NVR Viewer is not started up.
Automatic detection of network cameras
Significantly reduces the hassle of complex camera registration procedures.
In addition, purchasing additional camera licenses enables the
VR-N1600U/E(A) to handle simultaneous recording up to 32
channels.
Built-in large-capacity hard disk (500 GB) (VR-N1600U/E)
Built-in hard disk (250 GB) (VR-N900U)
Supports HDD expansion
You can add 250 GB HDD for internal of VR-N900U, and 500 GB HDD
for internal of VR-N1600U/E.
For external, up to 2 TB HDD units can be added for both models of
For details, please consult your nearest JVC dealer.
Supports cameras that allow bidirectional audio
transmission (VR-N1600U/E)
Microphone audio that is input into the AUDIO IN 1 terminal is
transmitted to the camera that supports bidirectional audio
transmission, and output from the speakers connected to the camera
.
VR-N900U and VR-N1600U/E
.
How to Read this Manual
Simultaneous recording up to 9 channels at 120
ips (VR-N900U)
Ⅵ
Documents
There are two documents on this unit.
(1) Startup Guide
Equipped with 4-channel analog input (VR-N900U)
This comes in a booklet together with this product. It is
also available in the PDF file format. You can find it in the
CD-ROM provided.
Display/Distribution performance at 80 ips
(VR-N1600U/E) and 160 ips (VR-N1600U/E(A))
(2) Instruction Manual (PDF)
This manual is available in the PDF file format. You can
find it in the CD-ROM provided.
Display performance of 60 ips and distribution
performance of 30 ips (VR-N900U)
Ⅵ
Symbols Used in this Manual
Caution
Notes
Precautions to take during operation of this unit.
Enables simultaneous recording and playback
Playback of recorded images, jog dial playback and skip playback are
possible while recording is in progress.
Details for reference, such as functions and
restrictions on uses.
Page or item to refer to.
A
Ⅵ
Content of this Manual
Direct Search
Enables you to retrieve data of a specific date/time or alarm position
speedily.
●
The copyright of this manual belongs to JVC.
Reproduction or copy of this manual, in part or in whole,
without the prior consent of JVC is strictly prohibited.
Product names used in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective companies.
Symbols such as ™, ®, and © are omitted in this manual.
Milestone and XProtect Enterprise are the registered
trademarks of Milestone Systems, Inc.
●
Power failure recovery record
If a power failure occurs during recording, the system resumes
recording in the mode selected before the power failure after recovery.
●
●
Designs, specifications and other details used in this
manual may be modified for improvement without prior
notice.
Alarm recording
Enables recording to start automatically in the alarm recording mode
when alarm signal input is received during recording.
●
Images and illustrations of VR-N1600U/E are used in the
explanation of this manual except for some special cases.
When images or illustrations of VR-N900U are used, the
model name is indicated at the top right corner of the
illustration.
Motion Detect
Enables recording to start automatically when “motion” is detected in the
preset live image. You can also specify the detection area for each camera.
Alarm Mail Notification
Enables notification by e-mails to be sent out when an alarm or
motion is detected.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
o End-User License Agreement for Milestone's Software embedded in JVC's NVR products
This license agreement is a legally binding agreement among you (You, either an individual or a single entity), Milestone
Systems A/S (Milestone) and Victor Company of Japan, Limited (JVC) for the software product embedded in JVC's
Network Video Recorder(NVR) products (Software), which may include associated software components, media, printed
materials, and online or electronic documentation, if any. By using JVC's NVR product incorporating the Software, you
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.
The Software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws
and treaties. Note that the Software is licensed, not sold.
1. Grant of Use.
Milestone hereby grants you the right to use the Software on JVC's NVR products.
2. Copyright.
All title, including but not limited to copyrights, in and to the Software and any copies thereof are owned by Milestone. All
rights not expressively granted are reserved by Milestone.
3. No Warranties.
Milestone and JVC expressly disclaims any warranty for the Software. The Software and any related documentation is
provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, without limitation, the implied warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement. The entire risk and liability arising out of use or
performance of the Software remains with you as the user.You are notified that the Software, when used with certain
equipment or other software, may enable you to perform surveillance actions and data processing which are likely to be
restricted by or contrary to applicable law, including without limitation data privacy and criminal law. The sole responsibility
for verification of your use against compliance with applicable law lies with you as the user.
4. Limitation of Liability.
The provisions of this paragraph are in effect to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. In no event shall
Milestone, JVC or their suppliers be liable for any special, incidental, indirect, or consequential damages whatsoever
(including, without limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, or
any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use the Software or the provision of or failure to provide
proper support, even if Milestone or JVC have been advised of the possibility of such damages. Absent any wilful
misconduct or gross negligence, The entire liability of Milestone and JVC under any provision of this agreement shall be
limited to the amount paid by you for the Software portion of JVC's NVR product.
5. Miscellaneous.
You acknowledge that the Software is embedded in JVC's NVR products, and you may not make copies of the Software.
If necessary for backup and archival purposes, please contact JVC.
(a)
(b) You may not remove the Software from JVC's NVR product nor distribute copies of the Software to third parties.
(c)
You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the Software except to the extent permitted by
applicable law which cannot be contractually waived.
You may permanently transfer all of your rights for the Software, provided the recipient of JVCÕs NVR product
incorporating the Software agrees to the terms of this agreement.
(d)
6.Termination.
Without prejudice to any other rights, Milestone may terminate this license agreement if you fail to comply with its terms
and conditions. In such event you must cease to use the Software.
7. Governing Law.
These License Terms and the contract is governed by Japanese law and the sole and proper forum for the settlement of
disputes hereunder shall be the Tokyo District Court.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
VR-N1600U/VR-N1600E/VR-N900U (hereinafter referred to as “this device”) is installed with WindowsாXP Embedded Runtime
(hereinafter referred to as “the software”), a licensed software from Microsoft Corporation. By using this device and the software, you
agree to abide by the following Microsoft Software License Terms.
Microsoft Software License Terms for:
Windows XP Embedded Runtime
These license terms are an agreement between you and JVC. Please read them. They apply to the software included on this
device. The software also includes any separate media on which you received the software.
The software on this device includes software licensed from Microsoft Corporation or its affiliate.
The terms also apply to any Microsoft
● Updates,
● Supplements,
● Internet-based services, and
● Support services
for this software, unless other terms accompany those items. If so, those terms apply. If you obtain updates or supplements
directly from Microsoft, then Microsoft, and not JVC, licenses those to you.
As described below, using some features also operates as your consent to the transmission of certain standard
computer information for Internet-based services.
By using the software, you accept these terms. If you do not accept them, do not use or copy the software. Instead,
contact JVC to determine its return policy for a refund or credit.
If you comply with these license terms, you have the rights below.
1 Use Rights.
You may use the software on the device with which you acquired the software.
2 Additional Licensing Requirements and/or Use Rights.
a.Specific Use.
JVC designed this device for a specific use. You may only use the software for that use.
b.Other Software.
You may use other programs with the software as long as the other programs
● Directly support the manufacturer s specific use for the device, or
● Provide system utilities, resource management, or anti-virus or similar protection.
Software that provides consumer or business tasks or processes may not be run on the device. This includes email, word
processing, spreadsheet, database, scheduling and personal finance software. The device may use terminal services
protocols to access such software running on a server.
c.Device Connections.
● You may use terminal services protocols to connect the device to another device running business task or processes
software such as email, word processing, scheduling or spreadsheets.
● You may allow up to ten other devices to access the software to use
● File Services,
● Print Services,
● Internet Information Services, and
● Internet Connection Sharing and Telephony Services.
The ten connection limit applies to devices that access the software indirectly through multiplexing or other software or
hardware that pools connections. You may use unlimited inbound connections at any time via TCP/IP.
3 Scope of License.
The software is licensed, not sold. This agreement only gives you some rights to use the software. JVC and Microsoft reserve
all other rights. Unless applicable law gives you more rights despite this limitation, you may use the software only as expressly
permitted in this agreement. In doing so, you must comply with any technical limitations in the software that allow you to use it
only in certain ways. For more information, see the software documentation or contact JVC. Except and only to the extent
permitted by applicable law despite these limitations, you may not:
● Work around any technical limitations in the software;
● Reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the software;
● Make more copies of the software than specified in this agreement;
● Publish the software for others to copy;
● Rent, lease or lend the software; or
● Use the software for commercial software hosting services.
Except as expressly provided in this agreement, rights to access the software on this device do not give you any right to
implement Microsoft patents or other Microsoft intellectual property in software or devices that access this device.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may use remote access technologies in the software such as Remote Desktop to access the software remotely from
another device. You are responsible for obtaining any licenses required for use of these protocols to access other software.
● Remote Boot Feature.
If the JVC enabled the device Remote Boot feature of the software, you may
(i) your server and to deploy the software on licensed devices as part of the Remote Boot process; and
(ii) use the Remote Boot Installation Service only for deployment of the software to devices as part of the Remote Boot
process; and
(iii)download the software to licensed devices and use it on them.
For more information, please refer to the device documentation or contact JVC.
● Internet-Based Services.
Microsoft provides Internet-based services with the software. Microsoft may change or cancel them at any time.
a.Consent for Internet-Based Services.
The software features described below connect to Microsoft or service provider computer systems over the Internet. In
some cases, you will not receive a separate notice when they connect. You may switch off these features or not use them.
For more information about these features, visit
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/downloads/updates/sp2/docs/privacy.mspx.
By using these features, you consent to the transmission of this information.
Microsoft does not use the information to identify or contact you.
b.Computer Information.
The following features use Internet protocols, which send to the appropriate systems computer information, such as your
Internet protocol address, the type of operating system, browser and name and version of the software you are using, and
the language code of the device where you installed the software. Microsoft uses this information to make the Internet-
based services available to you.
● Web Content Features.
Features in the software can retrieve related content from Microsoft and provide it to you. To provide the content, these
features send to Microsoft the type of operating system, name and version of the software you are using, type of browser
and language code of the device where the software was installed. Examples of these features are clip art, templates,
online training, online assistance and Appshelp.
These features only operate when you activate them. You may choose to switch them off or not use them.
● Digital Certificates.
The software uses digital certificates. These digital certificates confirm the identity of Internet users sending X.509
standard encrypted information. The software retrieves certificates and updates certificate revocation lists. These
security features operate only when you use the Internet.
● Auto Root Update.
The Auto Root Update feature updates the list of trusted certificate authorities. You can switch off the Auto Root Update
feature.
● Windows Media Player.
When you use Windows Media Player, it checks with Microsoft for
● Compatible online music services in your region;
● New versions of the player; and
● Codecs if your device does not have the correct ones for playing content. You can switch off this feature. For more
information, go to:
http://microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/mp10/privacy.aspx.
● Windows Media Digital Rights Management.
Content owners use Windows Media digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their intellectual property,
including copyrights. This software and third party software use WMDRM to play and copy WMDRM-protected content. If
the software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software s ability to use
WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not affect other content. When you download licenses for
protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require
you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. Microsoft software that includes WMDRM will ask for your consent prior
to the upgrade. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade. You may
switch off WMDRM features that access the Internet. When these features are off, you can still play content for which you
have a valid license.
c.Misuse of Internet-based Services.
You may not use these services in any way that could harm them or impair anyone else s use of them. You may not use
the services to try to gain unauthorized access to any service, data, account or network by any means.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Microsoft Software License Terms for:
(continued)
4
Windows Update Agent (also known as Software Update Services).
The software on the device includes Windows Update Agent ( WUA ) functionality that may enable your device to connect
to and access updates ( Windows Updates ) from a server installed with the required server component. Without limiting
any other disclaimer in this Micrososoft Software License Terms or any EULA accompanying a Windows Update, you
acknowledge and agree that no warranty is provided by MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates with respect to any
Windows Update that you install or attempt to install on your device.
5
6
7
Product Support.
Contact JVC for support options. Refer to the support number provided with the device.
Backup Copy.
You may make one backup copy of the software. You may use it only to reinstall the software on the device.
Proof Of License.
If you acquired the software on the device, or on a disc or other media, a genuine Certificate of Authenticity label with a
genuine copy of the software identifies licensed software. To be valid, this label must be affixed to the device, or included on or
in JVC s software packaging. If you receive the label separately, it is not valid. You should keep the label on the device or
packaging to prove that you are licensed to use the software.
To identify genuine Microsoft software, see http://www.howtotell.com.
8
9
Transfer to a Third Party.
You may transfer the software only with the device, the Certificate of Authenticity label, and these license terms directly to a
third party. Before the transfer, that party must agree that these license terms apply to the transfer and use of the software.
You may not retain any copies of the software including the backup copy.
Not Fault Tolerant.
The software is not fault tolerant. JVC installed the software on the device and is responsible for how it operates on the device.
10 Restricted Use.
The Microsoft software was designed for systems that do not require fail-safe performance. You may not use the Microsoft
software in any device or system in which a malfunction of the software would result in foreseeable risk of injury or death to any
person. This includes operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems and air traffic control.
11 No Warranties for the Software.
The software is provided as is . You bear all risks of using it. Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or
conditions. Any warranties you receive regarding the device or the software do not originate from, and are not binding on,
Microsoft or its affiliates. When allowed by your local laws, JVC and Microsoft exclude implied warranties of merchantability,
fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 Liability Limitations.
You can recover from Microsoft and its affiliates only direct damages up to two hundred fifty U.S. Dollars (U.S. $250.00). You
cannot recover any other damages, including consequential, lost profits, special, indirect or incidental damages.
This limitation applies to:
● Anything related to the software, services, content (including code) on third party internet sites, or third party programs;
and
● Claims for breach of contract, breach of warranty, guarantee or condition, strict liability, negligence, or other tort to the
extent permitted by applicable law.
It also applies even if Microsoft should have been aware of the possibility of the damages.
The above limitation may not apply to you because your country may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental,
consequential or other damages.
13 Export Restrictions.
The software is subject to United States export laws and regulations. You must comply with all domestic and international
export laws and regulations that apply to the software. These laws include restrictions on destinations, end users and end use.
For additional information, see www.microsoft.com/exporting.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Contents
Adjusting the Playback Speed
(Jog/Shuttle Playback) ............................................41
Searching Recorded Image Using
[Time Navigation] ...................................................43
Searching Recorded Image Using the Timeline
Browser ..................................................................44
Writing Images/Audio Sound to CDs, DVDs and Other
Media (Export) ...........................................................47
Differences when operating VR-N1600U/E and
VR-N900U .................................................................21
Deleting Data from a CD-RW
(Operation on the Unit) ...........................................50
Writing Data to a USB Memory Device
(Operation on the Unit) ...........................................50
Printing Recorded Images
(Operation from a Surveillance Computer) ................51
Controlling Mouse Pointer from the Front Panel
(Without Connecting a Mouse (Sold Separately)) ... 28
Renaming Cameras and Assigning Camera
Numbers .................................................................60
Playing Back Recorded Images via Front Panel
Control .......................................................................40
Searching Recorded Image Using a Specific
Date/Time ...............................................................40
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display the [PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name]
Window ..................................................................90
Recording Before/After Occurrence of Event or
Motion ......................................................................139
Audio Transmission Application Control
(VR-N1600U/E) .......................................................127
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Precautions for Proper Use
of this Product
Precautions for Handling Hard Disk Drive
ⅷ The distance between the head and the disk is only about
0.02 μ m when the hard disk (henceforth HDD) is reading
the data. Vibration or impact that is exerted on the HDD
may therefore cause the head to hit against the disk,
hence causing the disk surface to dent or the disk to chip.
When this occurs, data may not be properly read, or in a
worse scenario, continued use in this condition may result
in head crash (damage). Careful attention must therefore
be paid when handling it.
Locations of Storage and Use
ⅷ Do not place this product at the following locations.
Doing so may cause this product to malfunction or break
down.
ⅷ Precautions During Installation and Change of Installation
●
●
●
●
Hot or cold places beyond the allowable operating
temperature range (5 to 40
Humid places beyond the allowable operating humidity
range (30%RH to 80%RH) (no condensation)
Places that emit a strong magnetic field, such as near
transformers and motors
Location
I
I)
Moving of this unit or installation work is strictly prohibited
when the power of this unit is on or immediately after the
power is turned off (approximately 1 minute). The HDD
continues to move under its own inertia for some time
after the power is disconnected, and exertion of vibration
or impact during this interval may result in HDD failure.
When moving this unit, wrap it using cushioning materials
to protect it from external shock.
Places near devices that emit radio waves, such as
transceivers and mobile phones
●
●
●
Places with considerable dust and sand
Places with strong vibrations
Places where water droplets may be formed, such as
window sides
ⅷ Handling Precautions
●
●
●
Handle this unit carefully without exerting vibration or
impact on it.
●
●
Places with considerable vapor and oil, such as kitchens
Places that emit radiation, X-rays, and corrosive gases
Do not remove the power plug during recording or
playback, or when the HDD is being accessed.
The HDD is a consumable product. Although it may vary
according to the environment of use, it is recommended to
replace the HDD after using for 18,000 hours in a
ⅷ Using this unit and the cable that is connected to it near
places where strong radio waves or magnetic fields (such
as near radios, TVs, transformers, and monitors) are
emitted may cause noises in the video images or color
changes.
surrounding temperature of 25I. (However, this is only a
reference time and not a quaranty for HDD life span. ) For
inquiries on maintenance plans and expenses, consult
your nearest JVC dealers.
Handling Precautions
ⅷ Do not stack the devices on one another during use.
ⅷ When installing an external hard disk, we recommend the
use of UPS (uninterruptible power supply) to ensure the
stable operation of the system. [Connecting a UPS]
Heat and noise from the devices may cause the unit to
malfunction or break down, and lead to fire.
ⅷ Do not block the ventilation holes.
ⅷ Power failure that occurs during formatting or
disconnection of the HDD may affect its subsequent use
even when the UPS is connected.
Doing so may cause heat to trap inside the unit and result
in fire. Do not use this unit by laying it down sideways,
upside down, or at an angle.
ⅷ JVC shall not be held responsible for the compensation of
losses incurred in the event that recording or playback
fails due to defects in this unit or its hard disk drive.
ⅷ Do not place objects on this unit.
Placing heavy objects, such as TV monitors, or objects
that are bigger in size on this unit may cause it to lose
balance and drop or fall, hence resulting in injuries.
ⅷ Images recorded on the HDD will be deleted when you
replace it with a new disk. Note also that recorded images
may be deleted when you upgrade the software for this
unit.
ⅷ Do not stand or sit on this unit.
Doing so may cause this unit to fall or break down, and
result in injuries. Keep it out of the reach of young
children.
Clock
ⅷ Do not place objects with water (e.g., vases, flower pots,
ⅷ Use of a time server is recommended to ensure recording
cups, cosmetic products, and chemicals) on this unit.
at an accurate time.
Water may enter this unit through the ventilation holes and
result in fire or electric shock.
ⅷ There may be a daily error of 10 to 20 seconds depending
on the operating environment.
ⅷ Do not insert objects into this unit.
ⅷ The clock time may vary significantly when the lithium
Metallic or other flammable objects that enter this unit
from the ventilation holes may result in fire or electric
shock.
battery level used for backup in this unit is running low.
ⅷ Connect the time server to the LAN2 network.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions when Moving this Unit
ⅷ Remove all connected cords before moving
Others
ⅷ When there is variation in the supply voltage such as
during lightning, operation of this unit may be disabled to
protect the system until the supply voltage stabilizes
again.
Turn off the power and remove the power plug before
moving this unit. Failure to do so may cause damage on
the cords, and result in fire or electric shock.
ⅷ Eliminate static electricity before performing work that
requires you to touch the input/output terminals, such as
when installing devices.
ⅷ Moving of this unit or installation work is strictly prohibited
when the power of this unit is on or immediately after the
power is turned off (approximately 1 minute).
ⅷ Do not touch the rear panel of this unit when it is running
The HDD continues to move under its own inertia for
some time after the power is disconnected, and exertion
of vibration or impact during this interval may result in
HDD failure.
as static electricity may cause it to malfunction.
ⅷ When there is a large number of data recorded on this
unit, such as short alarm records, a longer time may be
required during search or backup. This is not a
malfunction.
ⅷ When moving this unit, wrap it using cushioning materials
to protect it from external shock.
ⅷ Data recorded from TV broadcasts or video (audio)
recordings shall only be restricted to personal uses, and
their use without the prior consent of the copyright holder
is strictly prohibited under the copyright law.
ⅷ Handle this unit carefully without exerting vibration or
impact on it.
Precautions for Handling Power Cords
ⅷ Do not use the supplied cords on devices other than this
ⅷ The width of the border lines (black in color) of images on
the split screen varies according to the type of input
signals. This is due to the characteristics of the camera’s
input signals, and is not a malfunction. The condition may
also be improved by adjusting this unit. For details, consult
our authorized dealers or JVC service centers.
unit.
ⅷ Do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or place it
under this unit
Doing so may cause damage on the cords, and result in
fire or electric shock.
ⅷ This unit comes with a high-precision hard disk device. Be
careful not to exert vibration or impact on this unit when
handling it.
ⅷ Do not use cords other than those supplied with this unit
Use only power cords supplied together with this unit.
Using cords with different withstanding voltage
specifications or damaged cords may result in fire or
electric shock.
ⅷ Exertion of vibration or impact particularly when the power
is on or when the hard disk is being accessed may cause
this unit to break down.
ⅷ When moving this unit, do so about 1 minute after
ⅷ Do not remove the power plug during recording or
disconnecting the power supply.
playback, or when the HDD is being accessed.
ⅷ Do not turn off the power switch at the rear of this unit or
unplug the power cord during recording or playback, or
when the hard disk is being accessed. Otherwise, it may
break down.
Maintenance
ⅷ Turn off the power before performing maintenance of this
unit.
ⅷ Wipe this unit using a soft cloth. Wiping using thinner or
benzene may cause the surface to melt or fog. When the
surface is extremely dirty, wipe using a cloth that is dipped
into a neutral detergent diluted with water, followed by
wiping with a dry cloth.
Precautions During Master/Slave
Connection of Milestone XProtect
Enterprise (XPE) and this Unit
ⅷ Connect only one master PC to this slave unit.
Connecting multiple master computers to this slave unit
may cause it to malfunction.
Energy Conservation
ⅷ Turn off the power of the system for safety reasons and to
Software Installation
save energy if this unit is not to be used for a long time.
ⅷ Do not install any software to this device other than the
provided application software. Otherwise, operations may
become unstable. Any malfunctions arised in such a case
will not be covered under warranty.
Copyright
ⅷ Use of video or audio sound recorded using this unit for
commercial purposes or playing them for public viewing or
listening may be an infringement of the copyrights of their
respective authors under the copyright law.
ⅷ These video (audio) recordings shall only be restricted to
personal uses, and their use without prior consent of the
copyright holder is strictly prohibited under the copyright
law.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Part Names and Functions
(VR-N1600U/E)
Front
T
S
R
Q
WARNING
ALARM
HDD
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
P
O
OPERATE
REV
FWD
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
A
B
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
CDE
F G H
J K L
I
M
N
A
[OPERATE] Button/Indicator
F
Ⅵ
Status indicators
[WARNING] Indicator
Switches operation on or off. Press the button to turn operation
Lights up when an error occurs. (
Press and hold the [ALARM CLEAR] button to turn off the light.
[ALARM] Indicator
Lights up when an alarm is activated.
Goes off when the [ALARM CLEAR] button is pressed.
A
ON and hold down the button to turn operation OFF . The
B
A
B
indicator blinks while the recorder is starting up or shutting down.
Ⅵ
B
[REC CONTROL] Button/Indicator
Switches the recording control mode on or off. The indicator lights
up when the recording control mode is set to on.
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the [REC
CONTROL] button at the same time to display the menu.
Ⅵ
[HDD] Indicator
Lights up when the built-in hard disk drive is accessed.
[LOCK] Indicator
Lights up when operation is locked. (
[FUNCTION] Button
Ⅵ
Memo :
●
The main menu cannot be displayed in the recording control
mode or during recording.
The recording control mode performs recording in accordance
with the settings in the [Camera Record Setting] menu.
G
●
Press the [FUNCTION] together with another button to use the
corresponding features.
[SEARCH] Button
Displays the date and time search screen when in the playback
C
[SELECT] Button/Indicator
Use the key to set to the camera selection mode. The indicator
[PTZ/PRESET] Button/Indicator
Switches between the PTZ mode and PRESET mode of the
H
S
D
I
[KEY] Button
S
key.
When [KEY] button is pressed while pressing [FUNCTION] button,
key operation on front panel will be disabled. (Key locked mode)
To disable, perform same procedure again.
The mode changes each time the button is pressed. The indicator
lights up when PTZ mode is selected and blinks when PRESET
mode is selected.
Press to display or hide the Asoftware keyboardB.
Memo :
E
[SERIAL] Terminal
●
Use the software keyboard to input characters. (
For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse
(sold separately), flash memory (sold separately) or UPS (sold
separately).
J
[ALARM CLEAR] Button
Clears the [ALARM] display when an event occurs or motion is
detected. Press and hold this button to turn off the [WARNING]
indicator.
Memo :
●
Use the [SERIAL1 to 4] port on the rear panel for additional hard
disk drive connection. (
K
[REC/STOP] Button
Note :
●
Attach the serial port cover supplied with this product if this port
is not in use.
Press to start recording in all cameras. (When the recording control
mode is turned on, recording on all cameras starts after turning off
the recording control mode. ) Press and hold down to stop
recording.
●
This product may malfunction due to the presence of static
electricity. Remove any static before starting operation.
When in the recording control mode, press and hold this button to
exit the recording control mode.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
PTZ keypad mode (live image display screen only)
Moves the camera in the direction indicated by the arrow.
([1/ ][2/D] [3/ ][5/C][7/B] [9/ ][10/0/E] [11/ ])
[6/HOME] moves the camera to the home position.
Preset keypad mode (live image display screen only)
For selecting the preset position. ([1] to [9]. 10 to 19 can be
Memo :
●
The manual recording mode executes recording from all cameras
regardless of the settings in the [Camera Record Setting]. Recording
is carried out in accordance with the frame rate selected in [Camera
Record Setting]. (
selected when [10/0/E] is pressed at first.)
During search for recorded images
For narrowing down the search using a date, month, week, or time.
L
[STOP(PB)] Button
Stops playback when you press this button in the playback mode.
[PLAY] Button
●
●
M
([1/ ] to [10/0/
E],
A0
B
is input when the [10/0/E] button is pressed.)
Plays back at the speed and in the direction specified by the Shuttle Dial
position.
During display of software keyboard
●
●
Selection keypad mode
For entering numeric characters. ([1/ ] to [10/0/
when the [10/0/ ] button is pressed.)
PTZ keypad mode (live image display screen only)
Moves the mouse pointer in the direction indicated by the arrow.
[1/ ][2/ ] [3/ ][5/ ][7/ ] [9/ ][10/0/ ] [11/ ], [6/HOME] moves
the mouse pointer to the center of the screen.)
E
],
A0
B
is input
N
Ⅵ
[SKIP] Button
E
[S]
Press to move the item selection in the reverse direction in the menu or
settings screen. Jumps to the beginning of the previous sequence on
the selected camera when you press this button in the playback mode.
Press and hold it to jump to the first image in the database of the
selected camera.
D
C
B
E
[13/CANCEL]
Ⅵ
[T]
●
Setting screens on the main menu
Press to move the item selection in the forward direction in the menu or
settings screen. Jumps to the beginning of the next sequence on the
selected camera when you press this button in the playback mode.
Press and hold it to jump to the last image in the database of the
selected camera.
Cancels the selection.
[14/ZOOM OUT]
Live image display and recorded image playback screens
●
●
PTZ keypad mode (live image display screen only)
Zooms out.
Memo :
●
Preset keypad mode
●
“Sequence” indicates a certain block of images that are recorded
during motion detection.
For selecting the next view.
●
Recorded images are stored in the database. “Database” refers to
data recorded in this unit.
●
Press the [14/ZOOM OUT] button while holding down the
[FUNCTION] button to change the resolution of VGA output.
[15/ZOOM IN]
Live image display and recorded image playback screens
O
Jog dial
Plays back a single frame when it is rotated in the playback mode.
Shuttle dial
●
●
PTZ keypad mode (live image display screen only)
Zooms in.
P
●
Preset keypad mode
The position of the dial specifies the playback speed and playback
direction when in the playback mode. Playback speed is selectable from
x 1/20, x 1/5, x 1, x 2, x 5, x 10 and x 20 according to the angle.
For selecting the previous view.
●
Press the [15/ZOOM IN] button while holding down the [FUNCTION]
button to change the resolution of VGA output.
Q
[REC] Indicator
[16/ENTER]
Lights up during recording. Flashes during EMERGENCY or EXT REC
IN recording.
●
Setting screens on the main menu
Confirms the selection.
R
Center panel
Do not remove the cover.
Keypad buttons/Indicator
[0] to [16]
●
During display of software keyboard
To perform the mouse click operation.
S
T
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button/Indicator
Switches between the [Live] mode and [Browse] mode.
The indicator lights up when in the [Live] mode.
Pressing the [LIVE/BROWSE] button when the wallpaper screen is
displayed shows the [Live] screen.
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press and hold the [LIVE/
BROWSE] button at the same time to log out of the system.
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the [LIVE/BROWSE]
button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well as the internal
distribution server.
●
Login screen
●
For entry of passwords (numeric characters). ([1] to [10/0],
A
0B
is
input when the [10/0] button is pressed.)
●
Setting screens on the main menu
●
PTZ mode Keypad
For selecting a menu item. ([2/D], [10/0/E])
●
Camera selection keypad mode
For entering numeric characters. ([1] to [10/0],
the [10/0] button is pressed.)
Live image display and recorded image playback screens
A
0
B
is input when
Memo :
●
When [Auto Logon] is enabled, the login operation starts
automatically immediately after logging out.
●
●
Camera selection keypad mode
For selecting a camera number. Upon selecting, the indicator
corresponding to the selected camera input lights up.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Part Names and Functions
(VR-N1600U/E) (continued)
Rear Panel
d
POWER
ON
U
OFF
V
W
X
b
Z
a
Y
c
U
[POWER] switch
a
[SERIAL1 to 4] serial terminals 1 to 4
Switches the power on or off.
For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse
(sold separately), flash memory (sold separately), UPS (sold
separately) or additional disk drive (sold separately).
Memo :
●
Be sure to press and hold down the [OPERATE] button on the
front panel to shut down the system before switching off the
power supply.
b
[LAN2] LAN2 connection terminal (Intranet)
For connecting to the remote PC network using a LAN cable.
Color
Status
V
terminal
Connect to an AC120
supplied.
[AC IN 120V
H
240VH 50Hz/60Hz] power input
240 V outlet using the power cable
Left
Indicator
Off
On
Communication at 10 Mbit/
second.
H
Green
Communication at 100 Mbit/
second.
W
(RCA)
[AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2] audio input terminals 1/2
Orange On
Communication at 1 Gbit/
second.
Connect to the audio output terminal of the device from which audio
signals are to be recorded.
Right
Indicator
Off
Not connecting to the network.
Yellow
Blinking Communication is in progress.
X
[AUDIO OUT] audio output terminal (RCA)
c
Connector cover
Outputs live sound in the live viewing mode.
Outputs recorded sound in the playback mode.
Memo :
●
Do not remove the cover.
Memo :
●
There is no audio output when playing back still images, when
running searches other than x1, or when playing back frame-by-
frame.
d
Signal input/output terminals
For operating VR-N1600U/E using external alarm signals or signals
received from external devices, or for operating external devices by
outputting signals.
Y
[VGA OUT] VGA output terminal
Outputs live images, recorded images and the menu screens.
[LAN1] LAN1 connection terminal (camera network)
Memo :
●
Diameter of applicable cable: AWG22 to AWG28
Z
For connecting to the IP camera (sold separately) network using a
LAN cable.
Color
Status
Left
Indicator
Off
On
Communication at 10 Mbit/
second.
Green
Communication at 100 Mbit/
second.
Orange On
Off
Communication at 1 Gbit/
second.
Right
Not connecting to the network.
Indicator
Yellow
Blinking Communication is in progress.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear I/O Terminals
e
f h j l n
g i k m
o
ON
OFF
p
Ⅵ Input ports
Ⅵ Output ports
j [COMMON] signal ground terminal
e
[ALARM IN 1 to 8] alarm input terminals 1 to 8
Alarm recording is activated when signals are input to these
terminals.
This is a common ground terminal. Connect it to the signal ground
terminal on the connected device. (This can be used when there
are insufficient common ground terminals.)
f
[EMERGENCY] emergency input terminal
k
[ALARM OUT] alarm output terminal
Outputs a signal when recording is started by an alarm.
l [WARNING OUT] warning output terminal
Recording is activated in all cameras when a signal is input to this
terminal.
g
[ALARM RESET] alarm reset input terminal
Output from the alarm output terminal is stopped when a signal is
input during output of the Alarm Out signals.
Outputs a signal when an error such as operation abnormality
occurs on the hard disk.
Turns off the [ALARM] indicator
to turn off the [WARNING] indicator
F
on the unit. Press and hold down
m
[REC TALLY] recording status output terminal
F.
Outputs the recording status of this unit.
h
[EXT REC IN] external recording input terminal
n
[OPTION OUT1][OPTION OUT2] OPT OUT output
terminals 1/2
Recording in all cameras is started or stopped by an external signal.
Recording will not be started in cameras to which no video signal is
being input.
Outputs a signal when an event is detected.
[COMMON] signal ground terminal
Same as
[SIGNAL GND] signal ground terminal
i
[OPE ON/OFF] Operate ON/OFF terminal
o
Switches between OPERATE ON or OFF when a signal is input.
j.
p
Note :
●
Input ports
e
to
i
will not operate when the main menu is
This is a common ground terminal. Connect it to the signal ground
terminal on the connected device.
(This can be used when there are insufficient common ground
terminals.
displayed. Inputs such as alarms will also be ignored when the
main menu is displayed.
Memo :
●
Do not use this terminal for protective earthing.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Part Names and Functions
(VR-N900U)
Front Panel
V
U
T
S
R
Q
A
B
CDE F
G
I J
L M N
K
O
H
P
A
[OPERATE] Button/Indicator
Note :
●
Attach the serial port cover supplied with this product if this port
is not in use.
Switches operation on or off. Press the button to turn operation
ON and hold down the button to turn operation OFF . The
indicator blinks while the recorder is starting up or shutting down.
A
B
A
B
●
This product may malfunction due to the presence of static
electricity. Remove any static before starting operation.
B
[REC CONTROL] Button/Indicator
Switches the recording control mode on or off. The indicator lights
up when the recording control mode is set to on.
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the [REC
CONTROL] button at the same time to display the menu.
F
[ZOOM OUT/CANCEL] Button
Selects ZOOM OUT (
selects a view in PRESET mode.
Cancels the selected values in the Main Menu window. Also,
pressing the [ZOOM OUT/CANCEL] button while holding down the
[FUNCTION] button changes the resolution of VGA output.
Page 35) when PTZ mode is selected and
Memo :
●
The main menu cannot be displayed in the recording control
mode or during recording.
G
[ZOOM IN/ENTER] Button
●
The recording control mode performs recording in accordance
with the settings in the [Camera Record Setting] menu.
Selects ZOOM OUT (
selects a view in PRESET mode.
Page 35) when PTZ mode is selected and
Sets the selected values in the Main Menu window. Also, pressing
the [ZOOM IN/ENTER] button while holding down the [FUNCTION]
button changes the resolution of VGA output.
C
Use the
[SELECT] Button/Indicator
S
key to set to the camera selection mode. The indicator
You can control the click action of the mouse when the software
lights up when the camera selection mode is set to on. (
keyboard is displayed. (
Press the [FUNCTION] button, [ALARM CLEAR] button and the
[SELECT] button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well
as the internal distribution server.
H
Status indicators
Ⅵ
[WARNING] Indicator
Lights up when an error occurs. (
Press and hold the [ALARM CLEAR] button to turn off the light.
[ALARM] Indicator
D
[PTZ/PRESET] Button/Indicator
Switches between the PTZ mode and PRESET mode of the
S
key.
Ⅵ
The mode changes each time the button is pressed. The indicator
lights up when PTZ mode is selected and blinks when PRESET
mode is selected.
Lights up when an alarm is activated.
Goes off when the [ALARM CLEAR] button is pressed.
Ⅵ
[HDD] Indicator
Lights up when the built-in hard disk drive is accessed.
[LOCK] Indicator
Lights up when operation is locked. (
E
[SERIAL] Terminal
For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse
(sold separately), flash memory (sold separately) or UPS (sold
separately).
Ⅵ
Memo :
I
[FUNCTION] Button
●
Use the [SERIAL1 to 4] port on the rear panel for additional hard
Press the [FUNCTION] together with another button to use the
corresponding features.
disk drive connection. (
Press the [FUNCTION] button, [ALARM CLEAR] button and the
[SELECT] button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well
as the internal distribution server.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J
[SEARCH] Button
Q
Jog dial
Displays the date and time search screen when in the playback
Plays back a single frame when it is rotated in the playback mode.
R
Shuttle dial
K
[KEY] Button
The position of the dial specifies the playback speed and playback
direction when in the playback mode. Playback speed is selectable
from x 1/20, x 1/5, x 1, x 2, x 5, x 10 and x 20 according to the
angle.
When [KEY] button is pressed while pressing [FUNCTION] button,
key operation on front panel will be disabled. (Key locked mode)
To disable, perform same procedure again.
Press to display or hide the Asoftware keyboardB.
S
[REC] Indicator
Memo :
Lights up during recording. Flashes during EMERGENCY or EXT
REC IN recording.
●
Use the software keyboard to input characters. (
T
Center panel
L
[ALARM CLEAR] Button
Do not remove the cover.
Clears the [ALARM] display when an event occurs or motion is
detected. Press and hold this button to turn off the [WARNING]
indicator.
Press the [FUNCTION] button, [ALARM CLEAR] button and the
[SELECT] button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well
as the internal distribution server.
U
Keypad buttons/Indicator
[0] to [9]
Selects the camera input when viewing live images and when
playing back recorded images.
The indicator that corresponds to the selected camera input lights
up during camera selection mode.
Used to move the camera to the specified position during PTZ
mode, to enter the preset number during PRESET mode and to
narrow down the search date, month, week and time in the search
mode. You can move the mouse cursor when the software keyboard
M
[REC/STOP] Button
Press to start recording in all cameras. (When the recording control
mode is turned on, recording on all cameras starts after turning off
the recording control mode. ) Press and hold down to stop
recording.
When in the recording control mode, press and hold this button to
exit the recording control mode.
is displayed. When the main menu is displayed, press the [2/
[8/ ] button to move the option highlight. These buttons are also
used as numeric keys.
D] or
E
Memo :
●
Recording will not be started in cameras to which no video
signal is being input.
V
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button/Indicator
Switches between the [Live] mode and [Browse] mode.
The indicator lights up when in the [Live] mode.
Pressing the [LIVE/BROWSE] button when the wallpaper screen is
displayed shows the [Live] screen.
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press and hold the [LIVE/
BROWSE] button at the same time to log out of the system.
Press the [FUNCTION] button, [ALARM RESET] button and the
[SELECT] button at the same time to reboot the NVR Viewer as well
as the internal distribution server.
●
The manual recording mode executes recording from all
cameras regardless of the settings in the [Camera Record
Setting]. Recording is carried out in accordance with the frame
rate selected in [Camera Record Setting]. (
N
[STOP(PB)] Button
Stops playback when you press this button in the playback mode.
O
[PLAY] Button
Memo :
Plays back at the speed and in the direction specified by the Shuttle
Dial position.
●
When [Auto Logon] is enabled, the login operation starts
P
Ⅵ
[SKIP] Button
[S]
Press to move the item selection in the reverse direction in the
menu or settings screen. Jumps to the beginning of the previous
sequence on the selected camera when you press this button in the
playback mode. Press and hold it to jump to the first image in the
database of the selected camera.
Ⅵ
[T]
Press to move the item selection in the forward direction in the
menu or settings screen. Jumps to the beginning of the next
sequence on the selected camera when you press this button in the
playback mode. Press and hold it to jump to the last image in the
database of the selected camera.
Memo :
●
“Sequence” indicates a certain block of images that are recorded
during motion detection.
●
Recorded images are stored in the database. “Database” refers
to data recorded in this unit.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Part Names and Functions
(VR-N900U) (continued)
Rear Panel
i
h
g f
W
X
Y
Z
a
b c
d
e
W
[POWER] switch
e
Connector cover
Switches the power on or off.
Memo :
●
Do not remove the cover.
Memo :
●
Be sure to press and hold down the [OPERATE] button on the
front panel to shut down the system before switching off the
power supply.
f
[LAN1] LAN1 connection terminal (camera network)
For connecting to the IP camera (sold separately) network using a
LAN cable.
X
[AC IN 120V
terminal
Connect to an AC outlet using the power cable supplied.
[RESET]
H
240VH 50Hz/60Hz] power input
Color
Status
Left
Indicator
Off
Not connected to the network or
connected to a 10Mbit/Sec
network.
Y
Resets the system. Press this button when a malfunction occurs.
Green
Orange
Orange
On
On
Off
Connected to a 100Mbit/Sec
network.
Note :
●
Do not press this button in normal circumstances.
Connected to a 1Gbit/Sec
network.
Z
(RCA)
[AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2] audio input terminals 1/2
Right
Not communicating.
Indicator
Blinking Communicating.
Connect to the audio output terminal of the device from which audio
signals are to be recorded.
g
[LAN2] LAN2 connection terminal (Intranet)
a
[AUDIO OUT] audio output terminal (RCA)
For connecting to the remote PC network using a LAN cable.
Outputs live sound in the live viewing mode.
Outputs recorded sound in the playback mode.
Color
Status
Left
Indicator
Green
Off
Not connected to the network.
Memo :
Blinking Connected to the network.
Off Not communicating.
Blinking Communicating.
●
There is no audio output when playing back still images, when
running searches other than x1, or when playing back frame-by-
frame.
Right
Indicator
Green
h
[CAMERA CONTROL] camera control terminal
Lets you control the analog cameras.
Signal input/output terminals
b
[VIDEO IN1 to 4] camera video signal input terminals
1 to 4
Connect to the video output terminal of the analog camera (sold
separately).
i
For operating VR-N1600U/E using external alarm signals or signals
received from external devices, or for operating external devices by
outputting signals.
c
[VGA OUT] VGA output terminal
Outputs live images, recorded images and the menu screens.
[SERIAL1 to 4] serial terminals 1 to 4
Memo :
d
●
Diameter of applicable cable: AWG22 to AWG28
For connecting the communication control terminals on a mouse
(sold separately), flash memory (sold separately), UPS (sold
separately) or additional disk drive (sold separately).
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear I/O Terminals
j k m o q s
l n p r
t
u
Ⅵ Input ports
Ⅵ Output ports
o [COMMON] signal ground terminal
j
[ALARM IN 1 to 4] alarm input terminals 1 to 4
Alarm recording is activated when signals are input to these
terminals.
This is a common ground terminal. Connect it to the signal ground
terminal on the connected device. (This can be used when there
are insufficient common ground terminals.)
k
[EMERGENCY] emergency input terminal
p
[ALARM OUT] alarm output terminal
Outputs a signal when recording is started by an alarm.
q [WARNING OUT] warning output terminal
Recording is activated in all cameras when a signal is input to this
terminal.
l
[ALARM RESET] alarm reset input terminal
Output from the alarm output terminal is stopped when a signal is
input during output of the Alarm Out signals.
Outputs a signal when an error such as operation abnormality
occurs on the hard disk.
Turns off the [ALARM] indicator
to turn off the [WARNING] indicator
H
on the unit. Press and hold down
r
[REC TALLY] recording status output terminal
H.
Outputs the recording status of this unit.
m
[EXT REC IN] external recording input terminal
s
[OPTION OUT1][OPTION OUT2] OPT OUT output
terminals 1/2
Recording in all cameras is started or stopped by an external signal.
Recording will not be started in cameras to which no video signal is
being input.
Outputs a signal when an event is detected.
[COMMON] signal ground terminal
Same as
[SIGNAL GND] signal ground terminal
n
[OPE ON/OFF] Operate ON/OFF terminal
t
Switches between OPERATE ON or OFF when a signal is input.
o.
u
Note :
●
Input ports
j
to
n
will not operate when the main menu is
This is a common ground terminal. Connect it to the signal ground
terminal on the connected device.
(This can be used when there are insufficient common ground
terminals.
displayed. Inputs such as alarms will also be ignored when the
main menu is displayed.
Memo :
●
Do not use this terminal for protective earthing.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Rear Panel Terminals
Rear I/O Terminals
Terminal
Remarks
[ALARM IN]
Make Contact Input
ⅷ Name of Input Event
ⅷ Name of Input Event
Alarm IN 1 to 8 Rising (VR-N1600U/E)
Alarm IN 1 to 4 Rising (VR-N900U)
Alarm IN 1 to 8 Falling (VR-N1600U/E)
Alarm IN 1 to 4 Falling (VR-N900U)
250 ms and
above
250 ms and
above
Break
Make
Memo :
●
Set the impedance at the output end to 10 k
K
or lower.
[EMERGENCY]
[ALARM RESET]
Make Contact Input
250 ms and
above
Memo :
●
Set the impedance at the output end to 10 kK or lower.
[EXT REC IN]
Make Contact Input
250 ms and
above
Memo :
●
Set the impedance at the output end to 10 kK or lower.
[OPE ON/OFF]
Make Contact Input
Approx.
50 ms
OPE OFF
1 s and above
OPE ON
Memo :
●
Set the impedance at the output end to 10 k
K
or lower.
[REC TALLY]
Auto Collector Output
(DC15V, 10 mA and
below)
ⅷ Name of Output Event
ⅷ Name of Output Event
[ALARM OUT]
[WARNING OUT]
[OPTION OUT1]
[OPTION OUT2]
Set output Option Out 1,2 low
Set output Option Out 1,2 high
Make Output
(External Pull-up Level)
The make contact is formed using the individual output terminals and the COM terminal.
Turning off the power of this unit switches the output of the output terminals to break.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mounting to a Rack
Camera Control Terminal (VR-N900U)
Use connection cables according to the table below. Also make
sure that you read through the instruction manual of the equipment
to be connected.
Signal
Pin No.
RX+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Use the supplied rack mount bracket to mount this unit to the EIA
rack. For the installation to the rack, consult the specialist or dealer.
RX-
1 Mount the rack mount bracket using screw (1)
TX-
●
Use the 4 screws (M4 x 10 mm) supplied to fasten this unit
at the two sides.
TX+
GND
2 Remove the foot screws B (4 pcs) at the bottom
NC
of the unit
NC
●
Remove the foot.
NC
NC
3 Mount to the rack using screws C
●
Use the 4 screws (M5 x 11 mm) supplied to fasten this unit
to the rack.
(D-sub 9 pin, male)
Differences when
operating VR-N1600U/E
and VR-N900U
Rack Mount
Bracket
The name of control buttons and operating methods may vary
between VR-N1600U/E and VR-N900U. Such circumstances will
be indicated using the rules below.
Ⅵ When name of control button is different
A Indicated accordingly using [button name of
(4 Screws)
VR-N1600U/E] and (button name of VR-N900U)
Note :
B
`
mark is inserted at the end of the sentence
●
●
●
Do not place any object on this unit when it is mounted to the
rack. Doing so may cause it to lose balance and drop or fall,
hence resulting in injuries or damages.
When mounting more than one of this unit to the rack, make sure
to mount each at a distance that is at least equivalent to one
unit.
When remounting the removed foot, make sure to use same
screws (M3x6 mm). Using a longer screw may cause
malfunction.
B
A
Press the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER)button.
ꢀ
Ⅵ When operating method is different
The operation for the respective model is stated, and the model
name is indicated at the end of the sentence.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Operation Lock
During Initial Startup
VR-N1600U/VR-N1600E/VR-N900U is equipped with an operation
lock feature to prevent the system from being turned off accidentally
as well as unauthorized recording operations.
Perform language setting and automatic camera registration when
starting up this unit for the first time.
Before Starting Up.
Setting Operation Lock
●
The DHCP setting is required for the IP camera beforehand.
Start up this unit first, then switch the camera on after
confirming that the [Auto Detect Setting] window is displayed.
Refer to the user manual supplied with the camera for
instructions on how to specify the IP camera settings.
By default, Time zone is set to GMT. Specify a Time zone
according to the region used. Refer to the INSTRUCTIONS on
how to specify a Time zone settings.
1
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the
[KEY] button at the same time
●
●
●
Operation is locked. The [LOCK] indicator lights up when
in the operation lock mode.
Canceling Operation Lock
Keypad
1 (When in the operation lock mode) Press the
[KEY] button while holding down the
[FUNCTION] button
VR-N1600U/E
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
LOCK
●
●
Operation lock is canceled.
The light of the [LOCK] indicator goes off.
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
[LOCK] Indicator
VR-N1600U/E
[16/ENTER] Button
Keypad
[KEY] Button
[SKIP] Button
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
VR-N900U
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
[FUNCTION]
button
[KEY] Button
[LOCK] Indicator
VR-N900U
[ZOOM IN/ENTER]
Button
[KEY] Button
[SKIP] Button
Starting the Unit
[FUNCTION]
button
1 Turn on the power switch at the rear panel.
[KEY] Button
●
Doing so starts up the unit.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Check to ensure that the camera is detected
Selecting a Language
The [Language Setting] screen appears when you start up this unit
for the first time. Select the language to use using the steps below.
●
After the message disappears, a list of detected cameras
is displayed.
●
If all the cameras are not detected, press the [Auto Detect]
button again. If doing so does not solve the problem,
check the connection with the cameras and the IP
address of the cameras.
1 Select a language
●
Use the [2/D] or [10/0/E](8/E) button to select a language.
`
2 Use the [SKIP] button to select [OK], followed by
pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER)
3 Replace the detected camera accordingly in
button
`
sequence
●
The The system is being set up.B message may appear
A
Use the [SKIP] button to select the Sort button, followed by pressing
the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button to sort the order of the
depending on the setting, and the system is automatically
rebooted.
detected cameras in sequence.
`
Memo :
●
The Sort button allows you to perform [IP] sort, [MAC]
●
Selecting [OK] changes the color of the [OK] characters from
brown to orange.
sort, [CH] sort, [MAKER] sort, or [MODEL] sort.
●
After using the [SKIP] button to select the list, followed by
using [2/D] or [10/0/E](8/E) to select a camera, use the
[SKIP] button to select [Up] or [Down], and press the [16/
ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button to change the
Automatic Registration of Cameras
After you have started up this unit for the first time and finished
selecting a language, the [Auto Detect] screen appears.
sequence of the cameras.
`
●
Deselect the check box of any camera that you are not
using.
1 Check to ensure that [Auto Detect] is selected,
Note :
followed by pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/
●
Do not remove the check for Analog-In. (VR-N900U)
ENTER) button
`
Memo :
●
The
APlease wait...
B
message appears.
●
Priority is given to cameras at the top of the list during use, and
camera numbers will be registered in sequence from the top.
Devices other than the cameras may appear in the list. Uncheck
the boxes of these devices.
Memo :
●
●
The characters of the selected item switches to orange color.
4 Use the [SKIP] button to select [Entry], followed
by pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER)
button
`
●
The camera that is automatically detected is registered in
the system.
5 Select the analog input channel and signal
format to be used (VR-N900U)
VR-N900U
Memo :
●
In the case of VR-N900U, the analog input appears on the [Auto
Detect] screen from the start as the Analog-in network
encoder (IP video server) of 192.168.201.12
A
B
B.
A
5
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
11 Set the display rate of each camera such that
the total display rate of all cameras does not
exceed 80 ips (VR-N1600U/E), 160 ips
During Initial Startup
(Continued)
(VR-N1600U/E(A)), or 60 ips (VR-N900U).
●
The default display rate is set at 8 ips. The maximum
display performance of 80 ips will be exceeded if 11 or
more cameras are detected. In this case, you will need to
adjust the display rate of each camera using the following
steps. (VR-N1600U/E)
Automatic Registration of Cameras
(continued)
●
The default display rate is set at 8 ips. The maximum
display performance of 60 ips will be exceeded if 8 or
more cameras are detected. In this case, you will need to
adjust the display rate of each camera using the following
steps. (VR-N900U)
6 Use the [SKIP] button to select [OK], followed by
pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER)
button
`
●
The [Configure Device] screen appears.
Note :
●
The recording rate may drop if the total display rate of all cameras
exceeds 80 ips (VR-N1600U/E), 160 ips (VR-N1600U/E(A)), or
60 ips (VR-N900U).
When playing back the recorded images of VR-N1600U/E(A), set
the total display rate to 80 ips or below to display the playback
from the main unit and distribution for 13 channels or more
simultaneously.
A Press the [SKIP] button to select Device Manager
● The device at the top is selected.
7 Enter the password for the network camera
A
●
●
●
Press the [KEY] button to display the software keyboard.
Use the keypad to move the mouse cursor over the
software keyboard.
Pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button
inputs the characters on the keyboard into the password
field.
`
Memo :
●
For cameras with the
AAnalog-InB message (analog cameras),
proceed to Step . Password is not required. (VR-N900U)
7
B Use the [2/D] or [10/0/E](8/E) button to select a device
8 After password entry is complete, press [KEY]
`
again the close the software keyboard
9 Use the [SKIP] button to select [OK], followed by
pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER)
B
button
`
10 Repeat the steps from 5 to 7 for every detected
camera
●
The [Camera Record Setting] screen appears.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C Use the [7/B](5/B) button to display the list of cameras
Memo :
`
●
●
●
Use the [SKIP] to move between the setting items.
Using the [2/ ] or [10/0/ ](8/ ) button to select a parameter.
D
E
E
`
To enter numeric characters, press the [SELECT] button to turn
on the [SELECT] indicator. After entering the numeric
characters, press the [PTZ/PRESET] button to turn on the [PTZ/
PRESET] indicator.
C
G Use the [SKIP] button to select [OK], followed by
pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button
`
12 Repeat Step 10 for each camera
13 Use the [SKIP] button to select [Close],
followed by pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/
ENTER) button
`
D Use the [10/0/E](8/E) button to select a camera
`
●
●
Setting is complete and the [Live] screen appears.
The [REC CONTROL] indicator lights up, and recording
Memo :
●
For details on the recording control mode, refer to [Recording
You can specify decimal values using the software keyboard.
D
●
E
Use the [SKIP] button to select [Settings...], followed by
pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button
`
● The [Camera Settings] screen appears.
Speedup Settings
Recording
Settings
[Live] Screen
Live Settings
F Set the display rate for live images
● Set the display rate for live images to ASame as
recordingB or ASame sa speedupB under [Live
Settings].
● When ASame sa speedupB is selected, the [Frame
Rate] specified under [Speedup Settings] is used as
the display rate for live images.
● When ASame as recordingB is selected, the [Frame
Rate] specified under [Recording Settings] is used as
the display rate for live images.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
System Connection
Example
The following operations are possible with this system.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Surveillance of up to 16 cameras (VR-N1600U/E)/9 cameras (VR-N900U) (live image, recording and playback)
Checking recorded images on the VGA monitor
Recording/Playing sound
Transmitting audio data to a designated camera (VR-N1600U/E)
Alarm recording
Remote surveillance using PCs
Analog
cameras
Microphone
Speaker (with built-in amplifier)
VIDEO IN 1 to 4
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
ALARM IN/OUT
Mic Amp
ALARM IN/ALARM OUT
VR-N900U
ON
OFF
Supplied power cable
AC 120 H 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
VR-N1600U/E
VGA OUT
USB Mouse
LAN2
Surveillance computer
SERIAL
VGA monitor
IP cameras
LAN1
Switching
HUB
Switching
HUB
●
●
You can connect up to 16 cameras.
(VR-N1600U/E)
You can connect up to 9 cameras, out of which
a maximum of 4 analog cameras are allowed.
(VR-N900U)
SERIAL
●
You can connect up to 10 surveillance
computers.
Computer for configuring cameras
NAS
UPS control
UPS
120 V - 240 V
Memo :
Note :
●
●
●
Connect LAN1 to the camera network.
●
Connect only after having turned AOFFB the power of all devices.
LAN2 to the surveillance computer network.
●
Set the IP address of the camera to 192.168.0.xxx. When setting
the IP address of the camera to an address other than
192.168.0.xxx, you must also change the IP address of LAN1.
Refer to the [Instruction Manual] of each camera for procedures
to change the camera’s IP address,
For details of the protocol and port number for the network cameras
on the LAN1 network, refer to the network camera’s user manual.
The protocol and port number used on the LAN2 network are
shown below.
●
●
●
●
Surveillance computer: HTTP 80
Mail: SMTP 25, POP 110
Time Synchronization: NTP 123
●
●
●
Connect NAS to the LAN1 network.
Connect the time server to the LAN2 network.
Purchasing additional camera licenses enables the VR-N1600U/
E(A) to handle simultaneous recording up to 32 channels.
For details, please consult your nearest JVC dealer.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note :
Performance Meter
●
Do not connect LAN1 to the internet. If the internet is busy or the
relay equipment fails, you may not be able to save important
camera images. To maintain full recording capacity, it is
recommended that a dedicated network be used. Be sure to
connect the LAN1 camera network to the same segment. (Do
not use the address translation of NAT and NAPT etc. or a
router.)
This unit comes with a performance meter, which allows you to
check its load on the meter.
At high operating loads, the system may not be able to record at the
preset frame rate or operate normally.
●
●
If you connect LAN2 to the internet from a surveillance
computer, you will need to configure IP Masquerading.
Communication between LAN1 and LAN2 is not possible. Nor is
it possible to configure a camera connected to LAN1 from the
surveillance computer connected to LAN2. In order to configure
a camera connected to LAN1, it is necessary to connect the
computer for configuring cameras to LAN1.
1 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [1/ ] keypad button at the same time
●
The performance meter appears on the screen.
●
●
LAN1 and LAN2 are incompatible with QoS. Sound may not be
played normally depending on the condition of the circuit.
The default LAN1 IP address is 192.168.0.253 and the default
LAN2 IP address is 192.168.1.253. To change the address, use
Yellow
Green
Red
●
In VR-N900U, analog input circuitry is considered as a network
encoder (IP video server) and the IP address is set to
192.168.201.12 by default. When altering the IP address of
LAN1 and LAN2, specify an address (different segment) other
than 192.168.201.0 to 192.168.201.255. Also make sure that the
same segment is not specified for LAN1 and LAN2. (VR-N900U)
When a single network camera is registered with multiple units
of VR-N1600U/VR-N1600E/VR-N900U, recording may not be
properly completed in some cases. Camera control (e.g. PTZ
control) may also become unstable. It is recommended that a
single VR-N1600U/VR-N1600E/VR-N900U be used for
registering one IP camera as well as for controlling PTZ
operations.
●
Load factor of 5 % or less, indicated in gray
Load factor of 60 % or less, lights up in green
●
●
Do not connect a broken hub, router or deteriorated network
cable etc. Doing so may prevent the system from operating
properly.
Load factor of 90 % or less, lights up in green
and yellow
Connection to a keyboard is not recommended.
Load factor exceeds 90 %, lights up in green,
yellow and red
Memo :
Clock Display
●
●
●
The performance meter automatically appears after this unit
starts up.
To hide the performance meter, press the
while holding down the [FUNCTION] button.
To move the display position of the performance meter, left click
and drag it to the desired position.
keypad button
This unit comes with a clock display feature.
You can display the current time on the screen.
Note :
●
Do not use the recorder when the performance meter is
indicated in red.
1 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [2/D] keypad button at the same time
●
The clock is displayed at the top left corner of the screen
beside the performance meter.
Memo :
●
To turn the clock display off, press the [2/
holding down the [FUNCTION] button.
D] keypad button while
●
To move the clock display position, left click and drag the clock
display to the desired position.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Character Input and Mouse
Pointer
Entering Characters Using a Mouse
You can use the software keyboard to input characters when you
are using mouse.
1 Press the [KEY] button on the front panel
●
●
The software keyboard appears.
Press the [KEY] button again to hide the software
keyboard.
You can input characters and move the mouse pointers in two
different ways.
●
Operate using the buttons on the front panel.
●
Operate by connecting a mouse (sold separately).
Memo :
●
Connecting a mouse eases the specification of complex settings
as well as input of characters.
●
Connection to a keyboard is not recommended.
Keypad
VR-N1600U/E
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
Software Keyboard
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
2 Move the mouse pointer over the character on
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
the software keyboard that you want to enter
[16/ENTER] Button
[KEY] Button
3 Click on the character
Note :
●
The [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button is enabled with a
click of a mouse when the software keyboard is displayed.
`
Keypad
VR-N900U
Controlling Mouse Pointer from the Front
Panel (Without Connecting a Mouse (Sold
Separately))
When a mouse is not connected, you can operate the mouse
pointer from the front panel.
[ZOOM IN/ENTER] Button
[KEY] Button
1 Press the [KEY] button
●
●
The software keyboard appears.
Press the [KEY] button again to close the software
keyboard.
2 Move the mouse pointer with the keypad (arrow
key)
●
Pressing the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button has
the same effect as clicking at the position of the mouse
pointer.
`
Memo :
●
You can move the software keyboard by dragging any portion of
the keyboard other than the keys with the mouse.
●
To drag the software keyboard from the front panel, press the
arrow buttons on the keypad while holding down the [16/
ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button.
`
●
You can move the mouse pointer with the keypad when the
software keyboard is displayed.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Monitor
Resolution
Precautions when
Changing Display Settings
You can switch the resolution of the VGA output using the following
procedures.
The following table illustrates the relation between the number of
camera channels that are displayed simultaneously and the
selectable frame rate. When creating the view to display on screen,
be careful not to exceed the respective values as shown in the table.
●
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the [14/
ZOOM OUT](ZOOM OUT/CANCEL) button at the same time.
`
VR-N900U/(A)/(B) VR-N1600U/E VR-N1600U/E(A)
B
Pressing the button each time increases the resolution value.
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the [15/
ZOOM IN](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button at the same time.
Pressing the button each time decreases the resolution value.
Basic
●
performance
`
Recording/
Display/
120/60/30
160/80/80
160/160/160
B
Distribution ips
Preset
Values
:
1024 x 768 (Default value)
1280 x 768
1280 x 1024
Addition of
camera license
Inapplicable
Inapplicable
Applicable
1 to 9 ch: 60 ips 1 to 16 ch:
1 to 32 ch:
160 ips and
below
1600 x 1200
Live viewing
and below
80 ips and
below
VR-N1600U/E
1 to 12 ch:
160 ips and
below
13 to 16 ch:
80 ips and below
17 to 32 ch:
Inapplicable
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
Playback of
recorded
images
1 to 16 ch:
80 ips and
below
SELECT
1 to 9 ch: 60 ips
and below
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
Master-Slave
connection
Applicable
Applicable
Applicable
[14/ZOOM OUT]
Button
[FUNCTION] Button
Live viewing
on the NVR
unit during
Master-Slave
connection
1 to 16 ch:
80 ips and
below
1 to 32 ch:
160 ips and
below
[15/ZOOM IN] Button
1 to 9 ch: 60 ips
and below
VR-N900U
When the
number of
camera channels
registered to the
NVR unit among
displaying
Playback of
recorded
images on the
NVR unit
1 to 16 ch:
80 ips and
below
cameras is
1 to 9 ch: 60 ips
and below
1 to 12 ch:
during
Master-Slave
connection
[ZOOM OUT/
CANCEL] Button
160 ips and
[FUNCTION] Button
below
13 to 16 ch:
80 ips and below
17 to 32 ch:
Inapplicable
[ZOOM IN/ENTER] Button
Memo :
●
Selecting a resolution not supported by the monitor may prevent
normal monitor synchronization.
Depends on the Depends on
Depends on the
basic distribution
performance of
Live viewing
on the
surveillance
computer
basic
the basic
distribution
distribution
performance of performance each NVR
each NVR
of each NVR
Playback of
recorded
Depends on the Depends on
Depends on the
recorded images
playback
Precautions when
Changing Settings
basic
the basic
images on the distribution
distribution
surveillance
computer
performance of performance performance of
each NVR
of each NVR each NVR
Note :
●
While the basic display performance of the VR-N1600U/E(A) is
Note that any incorrect changes made to the settings of this unit
may cause it to malfunction.
160 ips, during the playback of recorded images, the display
performance is constrained by the above values depending on
the number of camera channels that are displayed
simultaneously on the NVR unit.
●
Before making any changes, save the current settings to [Flash
previous settings should anything go wrong.
It is recommended that you save the setting data before making
any changes.
The section at the bottom left of NVR Viewer might not be
operative depending on the monitor resolution. In such a case,
double-click the bar of the currently opened upper section to
close it to enable the operation of the lower section.
●
When playing back recorded images simultaneously on the NVR
unit and surveillance computer, set the number of camera
channels that are displayed simultaneously on the NVR unit and
surveillance computer and the total frame rate such that they do
not exceed the recorded images playback performance of each
NVR.
●
●
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Switching the Power On/
Off
Switching Operation On/
Off
Switching the Power On
1 Connect the power cable
Switching On/Off Using Operate Button on
Front Panel
You can switch operation to ON or OFF.
●
Connect using the power cable supplied to an AC100V
(50 Hz/60 Hz) outlet.
Ⅵ Switching Operation On
2 Turn AONB the power switch at the rear panel.
1 (When Operation is OFF) Press the [OPERATE]
●
●
●
A system check will run when the power is turned on.
The [OPERATE] indicator starts blinking.
After blinking, the [OPERATE] indicator lights up to
indicate that operation has been turned on.
When the setting is complete, recording starts
button
●
●
The [OPERATE] indicator starts blinking.
The [OPERATE] indicator lights up, indicating that
operation is enabled.
●
automatically in the record control mode. (When the
at startup checkbox of [Record Control] under [Unit
Setting 1] of the main menu is selected.)
AON
Memo :
B
●
When the power switch on the rear panel is turned on, the
system starts up automatically until the OPERATE ON mode is
activated.
Note :
●
Do not disconnect the power cord nor turn the power switch
OFF while the system check is running or in the OPERATE
ON mode. Otherwise, it may break down.
Ⅵ Switching Operation Off
A
B
1 (When operation is ON) Press and hold the
Memo :
[OPERATE] button for about 2 seconds
●
If the device does not start up even after the power switch on the
●
●
The [OPERATE] indicator starts blinking.
The screen display disappears and the [OPERATE]
indicator goes off, indicating that operation has been
turned off.
rear panel is turned
front panel.
AONB, press the [OPERATE] button on the
Note :
Switching the Power Off
●
Do not turn off the power until operation has been turned off.
1 Press and hold the [OPERATE] button for
about2 seconds to turn off the power
●
After blinking, the [OPERATE] indicator goes off.
Switching On/Off Using Input/Output
Terminal on Rear Panel
2 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel
For details on the layout of the input and output terminals on the
Note :
●
The recorded images may not be played back properly if they
are not archived (
It is recommended that an uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
be used to protect the hard disk from damage in the event of a
Page 110) before the power failure.
Ⅵ Switching Operation On
●
1 (When operation is OFF) Set the [OPE ON/OFF]
power failure. (
terminal to make for at least 50 ms
●
Be sure to press and hold down the [OPERATE] button on the
front panel to shut down the system before switching off the
power supply. Turning off the power switch on the rear panel
while the device is in the OPERATE ON mode may cause
malfunction.
●
●
The [OPERATE] indicator starts blinking.
The [OPERATE] indicator lights up, indicating that
operation is enabled.
Ⅵ Switching Operation Off
1 (When operation is OFF) Set the [OPE ON/OFF]
terminal to make for at least 1 s
●
●
The [OPERATE] indicator starts blinking.
The screen display disappears and the [OPERATE]
indicator goes off, indicating that operation has been
turned off.
Note :
●
Do not turn off the power until operation has been turned off.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
When [Live viewing Auto Start] is set to
AonB, the [Live]
screen appears when login is successful.
Login
If [Auto Logon] is set to AoffB, the [Login] screen appears after
operation has been turned on. (Default setting: AonB)
[Live] Screen
Memo :
●
You can specify the setting of [Live viewing Auto Start] in [Unit
Setting 1] of the main menu. (
Note :
●
●
Operation on the main unit is disabled if you do not log in.
[Logon] Screen
are not logged into the system. In this case, the [WARNING]
indicator lights up.
Memo :
●
You can specify the [on]/[off] setting of [Auto Logon] in [Unit
Setting 1] of the main menu. (
1 Enter the password using the keypad, and press
the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button
`
●
If login is successful, the wallpaper screen appears.
Wallpaper Screen
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
●
Select a menu with the [2/
press the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button to open
the selected setting screen.
D] or [10/0/E](8/E) button and
Opening the Main Menu
`
The same operation can be done using the [SKIP] button.
The following are procedures to open the main menu, which is used
for specifying various settings.
Note :
●
The input ports do not operate when the main menu is
displayed. Inputs such as alarms will also be ignored when the
main menu is displayed.
[SELECT] Button
[2/D] Button
VR-N1600U/E
[Main Menu](VR-N1600U/E)
WARNING
ALARM
HDD
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
OPERATE
REV
FWD
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
[FUNCTION]
Button
[REC/STOP]
Button
[SKIP] Button
[16/ENTER] Button
[13/CANCEL]
Button
[REC CONTROL]
Button
[10/0/E] Button
[SELECT] Button
[2/D] Button
VR-N900U
[Main Menu](VR-N900U)
3 Select an item
●
Select the required item using the [2/
button and specify the settings.
D] or [10/0/E](8/E)
`
●
Press the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button to save
the settings, and press the [13/CANCEL](ZOOM OUT/
CANCEL) button to close the screen and return to the
[FUNCTION]
Button
[REC/STOP] Button
[SKIP] Button
[ZOOM IN/ENTER] Button
main menu.
`
[ZOOM OUT/
Memo :
CANCEL] Button
[REC CONTROL]
Button
●
To exit the main menu, press the [13/CANCEL](ZOOM OUT/
CANCEL) button.
[8/E] Button
`
Note :
●
In some occasions, the NVR Viewer may appear instead when
you try to display the main menu while the NVR Viewer is
running. In this case, press the [LIVE/BROWSE] button on the
front panel and perform the operation to display the main menu
again.
1 Press and hold the [REC/STOP] button for at
least 2 seconds
●
Recording stops.
Memo :
●
When in the recording control mode, press and hold the [REC
CONTROL] button for at least 2 seconds to switch the recording
control mode off and stop recording.
For details on the recording mode, refer to [Recording Modes]
ⅷ For details on the main menu settings, refer to
●
2 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [REC CONTROL] button at the same
time
●
The main menu appears.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NVR Viewer
●
●
●
You can view live and recorded images using the NVR Viewer.
NVR Viewer can also be used for remote surveillance of this unit from a PC. (
Some of the NVR Viewer features may vary during remote surveillance from a PC.
[Live] Tab
View List
[
ן ] Button [Views] Section
NVR Viewer[Live] Screen
Memo :
Note :
●
NVR Viewer operates by logging into the distribution server
inside this unit.
●
You can restart the NVR Viewer using the following procedure. In
this case, the internal distribution server of this unit will also be
rebooted.
●
The built-in NVR Viewer logs into the distribution server of this
unt (http://localhost or http://127.0.0.1). By default, [Auto Login]
to this unit is set to [On]. For details on the login procedures,
●
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and press the
[LIVE/BROWSE] button at the same time. (VR-N1600U/E)
Press the [FUNCTION], [ALARM CLEAR], and [SELECT]
buttons at the same time. (VR-N900U)
●
●
The NVR Viewer is unable to log in when the maximum number
of clients are connected to the surveillance computer.
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button
Note :
WARNING
ALARM
HDD
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
●
When you have changed the settings in the [Camera Record
Setting] of the main menu, log out of the NVR Viewer, and log in
OPERATE
REV
FWD
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
●
When in the default state, you can click the [Connect] button on
the [Connect to Server] screen to log in.
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
When settings are changed, refer to the description after Step
2
[SELECT] Button [FUNCTION] [ALARM CLEAR] Button
Button
●
When the following symptoms appear, recovery may be possible
by restarting the NVR Viewer.
●
●
●
●
The image and sound may not properly synchronize during
playback on the NVR Viewer.
After you have completed the e-mail setting, perform a test to
●
●
●
Live video and playback images appear in black.
NVR Viewer action is slow.
NVR Viewer does not respond.
When an external hard disk is connected, it may take several
minutes to start up.
Do not start the NVR Viewer during recording on VR-N1600U/E
at a frame rate that exceeds 160 ips. Doing so may cause the
recording frame rate to drop.
●
Avoid the continuous playback of recorded images (1 hour or
more) as it may cause recordings to be missed, etc.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
NVR Viewer
Viewing Live Images via
Front Panel Control
This section describes the procedures for viewing live images by
using the front panel of this unit.
Memo :
[Browse] Screen
[Live] Screen
●
To operate by connecting a mouse (sold separately), refer to
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button
Select a View
[SELECT] Button
Keypad
For details on the view settings, refer to [Screen Setup]
VR-N1600U/E
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
SELECT
1 Press the [PTZ/PRESET] button to switch the
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
[PTZ/PRESET] indicator to the blinking mode
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
●
Press the [PTZ/PRESET] button to switch the [PTZ/
PRESET] indicator between the lit and blinking modes.
[FUNCTION]
Button
[ALARM CLEAR] Button
2 Press the [15/ZOOM IN](ZOOM IN/ENTER) and
[15/ZOOM IN] Button
[14/ZOOM OUT](ZOOM OUT/CANCEL) buttons
[14/ZOOM OUT] Button
[PTZ/PRESET] Button
to select a view
`
Note :
●
●
[REC CONTROL] Button
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button
Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval.
When live images do not appear on VN-C625U/VN-C655U, set
the password for connecting VN-C625U/VN-C655U on the
camera unit as well as this unit again. For details on the setting
procedures, refer to the [INSTRUCRTIONS] of the camera in
use and procedures for setting the root password on the [Edit
[SELECT] Button
Keypad
VR-N900U
device settings] screen in this manual (
●
The audio setting is restored to No Audio Sources when you
A
B
return from the setting screen to [Live]. Select the parameters
again.
[FUNCTION]
Button
[ALARM CLEAR] Button
[ZOOM IN/ENTER] Button
Select a Camera
Select the camera image that you want to view as follows.
[ZOOM OUT/CANCEL] Button
[PTZ/PRESET] Button
[REC CONTROL] Button
1 Press the [SELECT] button
●
The [SELECT] indicator lights up.
Displaying the [Live] Screen
2 Enter the camera number with the keypad
1 Press the [LIVE/BROWSE] button when the
wallpaper *1 or main menu *2 screen is
displayed.
●
Enter using the [1] to [16] keys in the case of VR-N1600U/
E, and [0] to [9] in the case of VR-N900U.
Memo :
●
You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing
[10/0] followed by a number from [10/0] to [9]. (VR-N1600U/E)
You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing
[0] followed by a number from [0] to [9]. Numbers from 20 cannot
be selected. (VR-N900U)
●
●
●
When you have selected a camera, the blue bar at the top
of each live image changes to a lighter blue tone.
Each bar comes with a tri-color square indicator, which
indicates the following features, as well as characters that
indicate the operating status of the camera.
*1 Wallpaper Screen
*2 Main Menu Screen
●
●
Press the [LIVE/BROWSE] button when the [Browse]
screen is displayed.
Press the button to toggle between the [Live] and [Browse]
screens.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Camera
PTZ stands for pan, tilt and zoom.
A
B
If the camera supports the PTZ functions, you can use the keypad,
and the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) and [13/CANCEL](ZOOM
OUT/CANCEL) buttons to move the camera up/down (tilt), left/right
C
D
(pan), or enlarge/reduce the image (zoom).
`
Ⅵ Pan/Tilt
1 Press the [PTZ/PRESET] button to switch the
keypad to the PTZ mode
●
●
The [PTZ/PRESET] indicator lights up.
Press the button to switch between the
A
PTZ Mode
B
(indicator lights up) and
blinking).
APreset ModeB (indicator
2 Press the 1 to 9 key on the keypad
●
Pans/Tilts in the direction indicated by the arrow on the
keys.
●
Press the [6/HOME](5/HOME) key to move to the home
position.
`
[Live] Screen
Ⅵ Zoom In/Zoom Out
A Event indicator (Left: yellow)
1 Press the [PTZ/PRESET] button to switch the
Lights up when events specified in the [Camera Record
Setting] occur. The indicator appears black if event
indication has not been specified for the camera in
question, or if no specified event has occurred.
keypad to the PTZ mode
●
●
The [PTZ/PRESET] indicator lights up.
Press the button to switch between the
A
PTZ Mode
B
(indicator lights up) and
blinking).
APreset ModeB (indicator
B Motion indicator (Center: red)
Lights up when motion is detected.
2
Press the [15/ZOOM IN](ZOOM IN/ENTER) or [14/
ZOOM OUT](ZOOM OUT/CANCEL) button
C Online indicator (Right: green)
`
Blinks every time an image is received from the camera.
D Operating status of the camera (Characters to the left
of the indicator)
Ⅵ Using Preset Positions
1 Press the [PTZ/PRESET] button to switch the
Display
Status
keypad to the Preset mode
Live (Green)
When live images are displayed without
being recorded
●
●
The [PTZ/PRESET] indicator starts blinking.
Press the button to switch between the PTZ Mode
(indicator
A
B
Recording (Red) When recording is in progress
(indicator lights up) and
blinking).
APreset ModeB
Stop (Yellow)
When images are not acquired from the
camera, or when the camera is in the
offline mode (
2 Enter the preset number using the keypad
●
●
●
You can press the [ALARM CLEAR] button to hide the event
indicator and motion indicator.
●
Enter using the [1] to [16] keys in the case of VR-N1600U/
E, and [0] to [9] in the case of VR-N900U.
The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the
name of the device to which the camera is connected.
Entering the number of the selected camera switches to an
enlarged display. To return to normal display, enter the camera
number of the enlarged display. You can identify the camera
number of the [Camera Record Setting] screen of the main
menu.
●
The camera moves to the preset position.
Memo :
●
●
●
You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing
[10/0] followed by a number from [10/0] to [9]. (VR-N1600U/E)
You can specify a camera number between 10 to 19 by pressing
[0] followed by a number from [0] to [9]. (VR-N900U)
To specify a number beyond 20, use the mouse to make a
selection from the [Presets:] list in the [PTZ Control] section.
Note :
●
You need to specify the preset positions in advance in order to
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Viewing Live Images via
Mouse Control
Select a View
For details on the view settings, refer to [Screen Setup]
1 Select a view from the [Views] section, or from
the view list at the upper end of the window
This section describes the procedures for viewing live images by
controlling the mouse.
Note :
●
Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval.
When live images do not appear on VN-C625U/VN-C655U, set
the password for connecting VN-C625U/VN-C655U on the
camera unit as well as this unit again. For details on the setting
procedures, refer to the [INSTRUCRTIONS] of the camera in
use and procedures for setting the root password on the [Edit
●
Displaying the [Live] Screen
1 Select [Live] from the main menu
●
●
The NVR Viewer starts up and the [Live] screen appears.
When the [Browse] or [Screen Setup] screen of the NVR
Viewer is displayed, click the [Live] tab.
device settings] screen in this manual (
●
The audio setting is restored to No Audio Sources when you
A
B
return from the setting screen to [Live]. Set the audio parameters
again.
●
To exit the NVR Viewer, click the [
ן ] button. [Live] Tab
[Views] Section
[
ן ] Button View List
Select a Camera
1 Select a camera by clicking on the bar at the
upper end of the screen of the camera to select
using the mouse
●
When you have selected a camera, the blue bar at the top
of each live image changes to a lighter blue tone.
[Outputs...] Section
[Event] Section
A
B
C
D
[Live] Screen
●
If you have specified the camera record settings without closing
the [Live] screen, live images may not appear immediately after
you have exited the camera settings.
In this case,
the server or
name(camera name)! Reconnecting to the server
A
Unable to connect to the server! Reconnecting to
Unable to connect to 127.0.0.1:80 on the device
will appear
B
A
B
on the [Live] screen. (127.0.0.1:80 is the internal IP address of
this unit that is currently in operation.)
[Live] Screen
Memo :
[PTZ Control] Section
●
Depending on the condition of the network circuit, it may take
[Audio] Section
some time before images from the camera are displayed.
Depending on the connection of the additional hard disk, several
minutes may be required for the [Live] screen to appear.
●
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo :
●
When you have selected a camera, the blue bar at the top of
PTZ Navigation Button
each live image changes to a lighter blue tone. This bar comes
with a tri-color square indicator, which indicates the following
features, as well as characters that indicate the operating status
of the camera.
Home Button
A Event indicator (Left: yellow)
Lights up when events specified in the [Camera Record
Setting] occur. The indicator appears black if event
indication has not been specified for the camera in
question, or if no specified event has occurred.
B Motion indicator (Center: red)
Lights up when motion is detected.
C Online indicator (Right indicator: Green)
Blinks every time an image is received from the camera.
[Live] Screen
D Operating status of the camera (Characters to the left
Note :
●
of the indicator)
The PTZ features are only available if the camera supports the
PTZ functions. If the camera is not a PTZ camera, pressing the
button will have no effect.
Display
Status
Live (Green)
When live images are displayed without
being recorded
Memo :
●
If you see a set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer
over the image from a PTZ camera, then you are able to control
the orientation of the camera using point-and-click control on the
image screen. Control of the camera on the image screen is not
possible if the mouse pointer does not change to the cross
shape pointer. The mouse pointer may not change to the cross-
shape pointer depending on the type of the PTZ camera. Control
of the PTZ camera may not be possible for some PTZ cameras
even though the mouse pointer changes to the cross-shape
pointer. In this case, use the PTZ navigation button of the [PTZ
Control] section to control the PTZ camera.
REC (Red)
When recording is in progress
Stop (Yellow)
When images are not acquired from the
camera, or when the camera is in the
offline mode (
●
●
●
The image bar displays the name of the camera as well as the
name of the device to which the camera is connected.
To enlarge the camera image, double-click the blue bar at the
top. To return to the original size, double-click the blue bar again.
You can turn off the light of the indicator by clicking the event or
motion indicator that is lit.
●
The mouse pointer does not change to the cross shape pointer
for analog cameras that are connected to the network encoder
(IP video server) (e.g. VN-E4).
●
●
If your mouse is equipped with a scroll wheel, you can use it to
control the zoom in and out function on the PTZ camera.
When using electronic zoom feature on VN-C625U/VN-C655U,
zooming will stop at the boundary between optical zoom and
electronic zoom. To continue zooming, perform zoom operation
again.
Viewing Images Using the PTZ Features
PTZ stands for pan, tilt and zoom.
The PTZ features are only available if the camera supports the PTZ
functions. If the camera is not a PTZ camera, pressing the button
will have no effect.
1 Click the PTZ navigation button in the [PTZ
Control] section
●
●
The camera moves in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Click the round button at the center to return to the home
position.
●
Click the [+] and [-] buttons to zoom in and out
respectively.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Viewing Live Images via
Mouse Control (continued)
Using Preset Positions
You can select a position from the preset list to change the camera
Memo :
●
The buttons are only available if the camera is a PTZ camera.
Viewing Images Using the PTZ Features
(continued)
[Presets] List
Ⅵ Digital Zoom
By selecting the [Digital Zoom] check box in the [PTZ Control]
section, you are able to use digital zoom on images from any
camera displayed in the view. When digital zoom is enabled, you will
see a small overview frame at the bottom right corner.
PTZ Navigation Button
1 Click the [v] button on the [Presets] list in the
[PTZ Control] section
[Digital Zoom]
●
The preset list appears on the screen.
2 Select a preset position from the preset list
●
The camera moves to the preset position.
Memo :
●
You can configure the preset list by going to Main Menu
[Camera Record Setting] [Settings...] [PTZ Preset
B
B
B
[Live] Screen
Other Useful Functions
Ⅵ Listening to Audio Sound
Memo :
●
●
●
The recorded images will not be recorded in zoom even when
digital zoom is used.
To listen to live audio sound, select the required audio source from
the [Audio Source] list of the [Audio] section.
To temporarily mute the live audio sound, select the [Mute] check
box.
When digital zoom is used, the recording frame rate may
decrease due to an increase in the load factor of this unit.
To exit the digital zoom function, deselect the [Digital Zoom]
check box.
Note :
●
When [Digital Zoom] is ticked, the actual PTZ operation will not
be performed.
Select check box
[Live] Screen
Note :
●
When the audio source is selected by multiple surveillance
computers, the sound quality may deteriorate.
●
The audio setting is restored to ANo Audio SourcesB when you
return from the setting screen to [Live]. Select the parameters
again.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Camera Shortcut Menus
Memo :
●
●
●
If you have selected a camera for which an audio source has
been set on the [Camera Settings] screen of [Camera Record
You can right-click on one of the images from the camera to access
the shortcut menu.
Items in the shortcut menu may vary according to the configuration
of the selected camera.
If you have selected a camera for which an audio source has not
been specified, the most recently selected audio source will be
continuously output.
When the recorded and live images are simultaneously
displayed, the displayed video image and audio sound may not
synchronize properly. (However, this has no impact on recording
to the system or additional hard disk.)
A
B
C
D
E
Ⅵ Manually Triggering an Event
To manually trigger an event, select the event in the [Event] section,
and click the [Activate] button.
Click
Item
Description
A Camera
Displays the video image of another
camera in the selected position.
B Sound
Temporarily mutes warning sounds.
Notifications
C PTZ Presets Moves the camera to the preset position
you have selected.
D Matrix
Select this option to use the Milestone
XProtect Matrix feature.
[Live] Screen
Memo :
●
For details, refer to the Milestone
XProtect Matrix manual available on the
website of Milestone Systems (http://
www.milestonesys.com).
Memo :
●
For details on events, refer to [Camera Input/Output Port and
●
The URL address may be subject to
changes.
●
Events must be defined in advance. (
Ⅵ Triggering Outputs
E Send
Sends images from the selected camera to
another single-camera position in an open
view.
To trigger an output, select the output in the [Outputs...] section, and
click the [Activate] button.
Camera
[Live] Screen
Click
Memo :
●
Outputs must be defined in advance.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Playing Back Recorded
Images via Front Panel
Control
Select a View
For details on the view settings, refer to [Screen Setup]
1 Press the [PTZ/PRESET] button so that the [PTZ/
PRESET] indicator starts to blink
●
The [PTZ/PRESET] indicator switches between lit and
blinking each time the [PTZ/PRESET] button is pressed.
This section describes the procedures for viewing recorded images
using the front panel of this unit.
2 Press the [15/Zoom In] (ZOOM IN/ENTER) and
[STOP(PB)] Button
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button/Indicator
Keypad/Indicator
[14/Zoom Out] (ZOOM OUT/CANCEL) buttons to
select a view
`
VR-N1600U/E
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
Note :
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
●
●
Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval.
When live images do not appear on VN-C625U/VN-C655U, set
the password for connecting VN-C625U/VN-C655U on the
camera unit as well as this unit again. For details on the setting
procedures, refer to the [INSTRUCRTIONS] of the camera in
use and procedures for setting the root password on the [Edit
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
キーロック
KEY
FUNCTION
SEARCH
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
[SEARCH] Button
[16/ENTER] Button
[13/CANCEL] Button
[SKIP] Button
device settings] screen in this manual (
Setting of the [Audio] section is restored to
No Audio SourcesB
●
A
[PTZ/PRESET] Button/Indicator
when you return from the setting screen to [Browse]. Select the
parameters again.
[LIVE/BROWSE] Button/Indicator
Keypad/Indicator
[STOP(PB)] Button
Searching Recorded Image Using a
Specific Date/Time
VR-N900U
You can search for and play back images by specifying a date and
time using the [SEARCH] button on the front panel.
1 Press the [SEARCH] button on the [Browse]
screen
[SEARCH] Button
●
The date and time input screen appears.
[SKIP] Button
[ZOOM IN/ENTER] Button
[ZOOM OUT/CANCEL] Button
[PTZ/PRESET] Button/Indicator
[Go To] Button
Displaying the [Browse] Screen
1 Press the [LIVE/BROWSE] button when the
wallpaper or main menu screen is displayed
●
The NVR Viewer starts up and the [Live] screen appears.
2 Use the keypad to enter the search date and
time
2 When the [Live] screen appears, press the
●
Use the [SKIP] button (S or T) to select an item and input
accordingly.
[LIVE/BROWSE] button again
●
Press the button to toggle between the [Live] and [Browse]
screens.
3
Press the [16/ENTER](ZOOM IN/ENTER) button
`
●
The view in the image display screen on the right jumps to
the selected date and time.
NVR Viewer
Memo :
●
You can also jump to the selected date/time by clicking the [Go
To] button.
●
When you are using the software keyboard, click the [Go To]
button.
[Browse] Screen
[Live] Screen
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing, Skipping and Stopping Recorded
Images
Adjusting the Playback Speed (Jog/
Shuttle Playback)
You can adjust the playback speed by turning the jog dial/shuttle
dial on the front panel.
Control using the [PLAY], [SKIP], and [STOP(PB)] buttons.
Ⅵ Control using the [PLAY], [SKIP], and
Ⅵ Shuttle Playback
[STOP(PB)] buttons on the front panel
●
Rotate the shuttle dial during playback or when playback is
paused to start fast forward, fast reverse or slow playback.
ⅷ Playing Back
1 Press the [PLAY] button
still
x1/20
x1/20
●
Playback starts from the date/time indicated on the
[Master Time] of [Time Navigation].
x1/5
x1/5
FWD
Shuttle Dial (External)
Jog Dial (Internal)
REV
x1
x2
x5
x1
x2
x5
●
Images are played back according to the angle of the
shuttle dial (x1/20, x1/5, x1, x2, x5, x10, x20).
x10
x10
NVR Viewer
[Master Time] area
x20
x20
Jog/Shuttle dial
Memo :
●
The playback speed that is indicated during fast forward or fast
reverse playback by rotating the shuttle dial is an approximate
value. The speed may differ depending on the conditions, such
as the playback mode (multi-view, single view) and the recording
mode (motion detection, recorded frame rate).
[Browse] Screen
[Go To] Button
[Time Navigation] Section
ⅷ Skipping
Ⅵ Jog Playback
●
●
Rotate the jog dial to play back frame by frame.
1 Press the [SKIP] button
Rotate the dial clockwise to play back a single frame in the
forward direction, and rotate the dial counterclockwise to play
back a single frame in the reverse direction.
●
The [SKIP] buttons have the following functions.
S
T
Moves to the first image in the previous sequence.
Moves to the first image in the database of the selected
camera when the button is pressed and held down.
●
Release the dial to pause the playback. However, when frames
are played back successively in the forward or reverse direction,
playback may continue momentarily after the jog dial is released.
Moves to the first image in the next sequence. Press and
hold down the button to move to the latest image in the
database of the selected camera.
Note :
●
●
The jog dial is only enabled when a camera has been selected.
When the playback speed is adjusted or when playing back at
high speed during recording, the frame rate of the recording may
decrease. Check the performance meter while adjusting the
playback speed to ensure that the display does not turn red.
Memo :
●
“Sequence” indicates a certain block of images that are recorded
during motion detection.
●
Recorded images are stored in the database.
Note :
●
The [SKIP] buttons are only enabled when a camera has been
selected.
●
During simultaneous recording and playback, an AAfter
Database End message may appear as playback catches up
B
with recording during playback near the current time.
When recording is set to be triggered by motion/event
●
Page 57), recording will not start unless a motion/event
occurs. During playback near the current time, however, the
image that is not recorded will also be played.
ⅷ Stopping
1 Press the [STOP(PB)] button
●
Playback stops.
ⅷ Enlarging a Display
●
Entering the number of the selected camera switches to an
enlarged display.
●
To return to normal display, enter the camera number of the
enlarged display.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
[
ן ] Button [Views] Section
Playing Back Recorded
Images via Mouse Control
Viewer
This section describes the procedures for viewing recorded images
by controlling the mouse.
Notes:
●
The recording frame rate may decline when you are using the
[Browse] screen.
●
When access to the hard disk occurs frequently, such as when
recording and playback of recorded images are performed
simultaneously, the playback image may pause and the audio
sound may be interrupted. (This has no impact on recording to
the system or additional hard disk.)
[Sequence] Section
[Alerts] Section
[Browse] Screen
[Time Navigation] Section
[Audio] Section
[Smart Search] Section
[Export] Section
●
●
The audio setting is restored to ANo Audio SourcesB when you
return from the setting screen to [Browse]. Set the audio
parameters again.
Set the time zone of the PC to the same time zone as this unit.
If recorded images are viewed on a PC with a different time
zone, the time displayed on the recorded images of this unit
will be converted to the time in the PC’s time zone.
When the time zone in [OS Setting] is altered, press the [LIVE/
BROWSE] while holding down the [FUNCTION] button to
reboot the NVR Viewer.
●
●
It may take a few minutes before the [Browse] screen is
displayed.
If you have specified the camera recording settings
without closing the [Browse] screen, the playback images
may not appear immediately after you have exited the
camera settings.
●
In this case,
Reconnecting to the server
127.0.0.1:80 on the device name(camera name)!
Reconnecting to the server will appear on the [Browse]
screen. (127.0.0.1:80 is the IP address of the this unit that
is currently in operation.)
A
Unable to connect to the server!
B
or AUnable to connect to
Displaying the [Browse] Screen
1 Select [Live] from the main menu
B
●
The NVR Viewer starts up and the [Live] screen appears.
2 Double-click the [Browse] tab on the NVR
●
●
If playback is executed when there are no recorded
Viewer.
images, the
AConnection:[NVR]Camera1 on
127.0.0.1:80
B
message will continue to appear on the
●
Similarly, click the [Browse] tab when the [Screen Setup]
screen of the NVR Viewer is displayed.
Playback screen.
To exit the NVR Viewer, click the Close button.
[Browse] Tab
Memo :
●
Each image bar comes with an online indicator at the top of the
[Browse] screen. The indicator lights up in green each time a
new image is displayed.
●
●
Recorded images are saved in the database. “Database” refers
to data recorded in this unit.
When ABefore Database StartB appears on the [Browse] screen,
no database (recorded image) is found in the position prior to the
currently viewed image.
●
When AAfter Database EndB appears on the [Browse] screen,
no database (recorded image) is found in the position after the
currently viewed image.
Note :
●
If several sections are opened on the left side of the [Browse]
screen, it may not be possible to display them all in the screen.
In this case, double-click the section bars to close the sections.
Do not switch the view frequently between [Live] and [Browse]
within a short time interval.
●
[Browse] Screen
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select a View
For details on the view settings, refer to [Screen Setup]
Searching Recorded Image Using [Time
Navigation]
You can search recorded images using [Browse] on the [Time
Navigation] screen as follows.
1 Select a view from the [Views] section, or from
the view list at the upper end of the window
1
2
Double-click the [Time Navigation] bar on the
[Browse] screen
Note :
●
●
Do not switch the view frequently within a short time interval.
When live images do not appear on VN-C625U/VN-C655U, set
the password for connecting VN-C625U/VN-C655U on the
camera unit as well as this unit again. For details on the setting
procedures, refer to the [INSTRUCRTIONS] of the camera in
use and procedures for setting the root password on the [Edit
Select the search date/time from the box
●
Specify the date in the left box and the time in the right
box.
3
Click the [Go To] button
●
The view in the image display screen jumps to the
specified date and time.
device settings] screen in this manual (
●
The audio setting is restored to No Audio Sources when you
A
B
●
The specified date and time will appear in the Master
Time area.
return from the setting screen to [Live]. Set the audio parameters
again.
NVR Viewer
Master Time Area
[Browse] Screen
[Go To] Button
[Time Navigation] Section
Memo :
●
The Master Time area displays the recording date and time of
the selected playback images. The master time is the time to
which all the cameras are linked, and when you specify a time,
all the recorded images you see in [Views] will be accurately
displayed.
●
There are cases when there is no recorded image on motion
detection or on the specified date/time among the multiple
cameras within the view. In this case, the last image in the
camera’s database prior to the specified point in time is
displayed in the view. (Recorded images are saved to the
database.)
●
The Master Time area also displays the currently selected
playback speed.
Note :
●
The Master Time area may display a recording date/time beyond
that of the latest recorded image. In this case, click the
button to move to the latest recorded image, and click the
button.
●
When ASkip gaps during playbackB in the [Time Navigation]
section is ticked, playback may stop when it exceeds the end of
the recorded portion during simultaneous recording and
playback. In this case, deselect the tick in [Skip gaps during
playback]. If playback stops, click the Play button again.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Memo :
Playing Back Recorded
Images via Mouse Control
(continued)
●
The items under the timeline browser enable you to specify the
time span to display on the timeline (1 hour, 2 hours, 1 day),
_
and whether to set the time flow from top to bottom or bottom to
top by using the [Newest images at top] check box. These
settings will not be saved. They will be lost each time the NVR
Viewer is rebooted.
●
●
●
If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can also use the scroll
wheel for browsing the timelines.
Double-click on any point within the timeline to display image at
the desired point in time.
When you do not need the timeline browser, you can hide it by
clicking the [Display ON/OFF] button at the center of the timeline
browser’s left edge.
Searching Recorded Image Using the
Timeline Browser
You can search recorded images using the Timeline Browser to the
right of the [Browse] screen.
The vertically extended timeline shows the recording status and the
number of cameras that can be displayed in the NVR Viewer. Drag
the timeline up or down with the mouse while checking the time
display pointer.
Note :
●
A portion of the timeline may not be refreshed if you drag the
timeline up and down using the mouse. In this case, reboot the
Note :
●
The timeline is an approximate value. Therefore, the display may
not coincide with the actual time.
Searching Recorded Image Using
Sequence
Sequences refers to sequences of images that are recorded when
an event or motion is detected. Each sequence contains a list of the
recorded images.
Timeline
1 Double-click the [Sequence] bar on the [Browse]
screen
[Sequence]
Sequence Bar
Display ON/
Time Display
NVR Viewer
OFF Button
Pointer
[Browse] Screen
2 Click [Get Sequence]
●
A list of 20 images each prior to and following the display
time appears.
[Timeline Browser]
●
If the [Preview Image] check box is selected, you are able
to preview the images by placing the mouse pointer over
the sequence in the list.
Ⅵ Timeline Colors and Lines
The timeline of the camera selected in the view is highlighted in a
lighter color.
3 Click a sequence in the list
●
Display of all the images in the view changes according to
the date/time of the selected sequence.
Red
Indicates recordings of motion detection or
events.
(Pink when highlighted.)
Memo :
●
Clicking the expand icon [+] next to a sequence in the list will
Green
Black
Shows recordings before and after motion
is detected.
(Light green when highlighted.)
show you the exact date and time of the first and last image in
the sequence as well as the exact date and time of the motion
detection or event that triggered the recording.
Indicates the period during which there is
no recording.
(Gray when highlighted.)
Note :
●
Page 57), a consecutive number of sequences may
sometimes be integrated into one sequence.
Center White Line
(Time Display
Pointer)
Shows the time of the displayed image.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching Recorded Image from the Alert
List
A list of recorded images is displayed for each [Alart], such as when
motion is detected (
1 Double-click the [Alerts] bar on the [Browse]
screen
2 Click [ ] on the [Alerts] list and select an event
from the list
●
You can select a specific event, camera or [Server].
NVR Viewer
[Alerts] List
4 Click and drag within the screen to specify the
search area.
●
●
The areas that you have selected become transparent.
Selecting the [Include] checkbox adds the dragged
section to the search area. Selecting the [Exclude]
checkbox deletes the dragged section from the search
area.
[PLAY] Screen
Event List
3 Click the [Get List] button
●
●
A list of detected events appears.
You can click on the event list to view recorded images of
the selected event.
5 Select the sensitivity level from the [Sensitivity]
list in [Search Setup]
●
The setting values are as follows.
[Very High]
[High]
[Medium]
[Low]
Memo :
●
The Alerts list displays events occurring around the time
(approx. 1 day before and after) set in [Time Navigation].
[Very Low]
Smart Search
Smart Search enables you to search the parts with motion by
specifying the search area within the recorded images of the
selected camera.
6 Set the time interval in the [Interval] list
7 Press the [Previous] or [Next] button to search
through data for which motion has been
detected within the area
1 Double-click the [Smart Search] bar on the
[Browse] screen
●
Smart Search begins. When motion is detected inside the
selected area, it will be highlighted in the view.
NVR Viewer
Note :
●
Smart Search is carried out in the [Forward] and [Backward]
directions from the time of the image you are viewing.
Smart Search that is performed during recording may lower the
recording frame rate. Check the performance meter while
adjusting the playback speed to ensure that the display does not
turn red.
5
6
●
2
[Browse] Screen
4
8 To continue searching, click the [Previous] and
[Next] buttons
7,8
Memo :
●
You can use the [Save] button to temporarily save the area that
you have selected in Step 4.
2 Tick [Show Grid] in [Search Area] setting
3 Select the camera to display
To return to the saved area settings, click the [Load] button after
selecting another area.
●
To cancel the area selection, tick [Exclude] and drag all the
areas.
●
A blue grid overlay appears.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
ⅷ [Time] Slider
Playing Back Recorded
Images via Mouse Control
(continued)
Dragging the slider to the left changes the recording date to an
older date, and dragging the slider to the right changes it to a more
recent date. Use the top slider bar for fine browsing (x0.4 to x240)
within a limited period of time, and use the bottom bar for easy
browsing (x20 to x36,000) for longer time spans.
ⅷ [Playback] Slider
The center position is for playback at normal speed (x1). Drag the
slider to the left and right to reduce and increase the playback
speed respectively. Dragging the slider to the leftmost position
pauses playback.
Playing, Skipping and Stopping Recorded
Images
Use the [Time Navigation] of the NVR Viewer to perform playback,
The playback speed is displayed at the top right of the [Master
Time] area.
stop, and skip operations.
Browse Button
NVR Viewer
● Play Button
: Plays back images in the reverse direction.
: Plays back images.
[Browse] Screen
[Time] Slider
: Stops playback.
[Playback] Slider
Play Button
Note :
●
The Play buttons do not work when the [Playback] slider is at its
leftmost position (paused). Select the desired speed by moving
the [Playback] Slider.
The angle of the shuttle dial does not affect playback, which is
operated in the [Time Navigation] section using a mouse.
The buttons and sliders have the following functions.
ⅷ Browse Button
●
Moves to the previous image on the selected camera
(frame-by-frame reverse playback).
:
:
Memo :
●
●
●
When ASkip gaps during playbackB of [Time Navigation] is
checked, playback is performed by skipping portions for which
no recorded image is found in the selected camera.
When the recorded images are played back with some images
skipped, the [SKIP] display will appear in red in the [Master
Time] area for some time.
During playback, skip playback operations may differ between a
single screen and multiple screens. Even if the selected camera
does not contain any recording, skipping will not take place as
long as recording is found in another camera. If recorded images
are not found, the last displayed image appears.
Moves to the next image on the selected camera
(frame-by-frame forward playback).
Moves to the first image in the previous sequence of
the selected camera. (This function may not work
properly when there is no sequence or for some
sequence lengths.)
:
:
Moves to the first image in the next sequence of the
selected camera. (This function may not work
properly if there is no sequence or for some sequence
lengths.)
Moves to the oldest recorded image of the selected
camera. (This function may not work properly at a
playback speed of 10x or higher.)
:
:
Moves to the latest recorded image of the selected
camera. (This function may not work properly at a
playback speed of 10x or higher.)
Note :
●
The browse buttons are only enabled when a camera has been
selected.
●
It may take several minutes for moving to complete after you
have pressed the browse buttons
. Note that if the
buttons are clicked continuously before the images are moved,
the selected sequences will be moved collectively.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Writing Images/Audio
Sound to CDs, DVDs and
Other Media (Export)
Listening to Audio Sound
To listen to recorded audio sound, select the required audio source
from the [Audio Source] list of the [Audio] section.
To temporarily mute the live audio sound, select the [Mute] check
box.
NVR Viewer
You can write (export) recorded images or audio sound to other
media.
●
The VR-N1600U/VR-N1600E/VR-N900U unit enables you to
write images and audio sound to a CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-
RW, or USB memory device.
●
On a surveillance computer, you can write recorded images and
audio to the desktop or to any folder you select.
[Browse] Screen
Select
(Operation on the unit)
Burning a CD/DVD
Note :
●
Steps 1 to 9 are common steps between writing to CD/DVD
and USB memory devices.
●
The sound may become distorted when audio is played back
with multiple surveillance computers.
●
The audio setting is restored to [No Audio Sources] when you
return from screen display setting to the [Live] or [Browse]
screen. To listen to an audio sound, reselect an audio source
from the [Audio Source] list.
1 Double-click the [Export] bar on the [Browse]
screen
●
●
There will be no audio output during still image playback or
2 Enter the start date and time
search/frame advance playback except at the speed of
ן 1. ●
Click the [Set] button to input the date/time of the Master
Time area.
When a recorded image is played back during recording, the
played back audio sound may be interrupted.
Memo :
3 Enter the end date and time
●
If you have selected an camera that has been set to record an
●
When the [Set] button is clicked, the time input will be a
second ahead of the date/time displayed in the Master
Time area.
audio sound, the specified audio sound will be output.
If you have selected a camera that is not set to record an audio
sound, the most recently played back audio sound will be output
continuously.
●
4 Select a camera from the [Source:] list, and click
the [AVI/JPEG Export...] or [Database Export...]
button
●
During simultaneous recording and playback of recorded
images, the playback image may pause and the sound may be
interrupted. (This has no impact on recording to the system or
additional hard disk.)
●
You can also select [-Current View Source-] when
selecting the source. When [-Current View Source-] is
selected, images from all cameras within the view are
exported.
●
This export dialog appears. The specified start time, end
time, and camera are shown in the dialog.
Master Time Area
NVR Viewer
2
3
4
[Browse] Screen
[Export] Section
Memo :
●
Export preparation may take some time depending on how the
external hard disk drive is connected.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
8 If you have selected [Database Export...], setting
Writing Images/Audio Sound
to CDs, DVDs and Other
Media (Export) (continued)
of the following items will be enabled.
Burning a CD/DVD (continued)
A
5 Select the export format if you have selected
B
C
[AVI/JPEG Export...]
●
●
Select either [AVI] (movie clip) or [JPEG] (still image).
Select whether to add time stamps to the exported
images.
6 Select the required frame rate if you have
9
selected the [AVI] format
●
Select either the [Full] option, which sends all images to
the AVI file, or the [Half] option, which reduces the size of
the AVI file by sending images on a per second basis
(though images will still be played back in real-time).
Item
Description
A Include Audio
Tick this box if you wish to include
audio sound in the image to export.
(You cannot select this check box if the
audio source does not contain any
data.)
7 If you have selected the [AVI] format, select [AVI
Codec] from the [AVI Codec] list and enter the
file name
B Compress
Exported
Select this check box to compress the
exported database.
●
The default file name is yyyymmdd-hhmmss.aviB.
A
Database
C Encrypt
Exported
Database
Select this check box to encrypt the
exported database. Specify a password
for subsequent decryption.
9 Assign a stand-alone viewer (application for
playing recorded images) to the data to be
exported
[NVR]
●
If you have selected [Database Export...], you are able to
include a stand-alone version of the viewer (application for
playing recorded images) to the data to be exported by
selecting the [Include Viewer Program Files] check box.
5
6
Memo :
●
To view the exported data on a PC, double-click the
7
[Browser.exe] file in the [Exported Images] folder of the USB
memory, CD-R/RW, or DVD-R/RW used for the export. It will
open the Viewer and you can view the exported data.
●
●
For details on the Viewer, refer to [Export Viewer] (
DB To include audio sound by exporting in the AVI format, open
the recorded image that has been exported in the DB format on
the Viewer, and export it again in the AVI format on the Viewer.
Note :
●
The [Database Export...] format enables you to export audio
sound together, which is not possible when you export in the
[AVI] or [JPEG] format.
Note :
●
●
●
Make sure that the total number of characters used for the
device and camera names does not exceed 61.
If recording fails, the recorder may not be able to read the
existing data correctly.
●
The recording frame rate may decline during export.
New data cannot be added to existing data on a DVD media.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Specify the export destination
To write data to a CD/DVD, select [CD].
14 Insert the media (CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW) that
you want to write data to into the CD/DVD drive
●
The space available in the media is shown in [Free Media
Space].
●
The [Burn] button is enabled (operable).
15 Select the check boxes for the AVI/JPG/DB
files that you want to write to the CD from the
data list.
●
The total volume of the selected data will appear in [Total
Selected Vol].
●
●
To select all the files, click the [Select All] button.
To deselect all the files, click the [Unsel.All] button.
[CD] Check Button
16 Press the [Burn] button
●
A [YES] or [NO] message asking you whether to start
writing appears. Select YES
A
B.
11
11 Click [Export]
●
Export begins to prepare for writing data to the CD/DVD.
12 When export is complete, connect the CD/DVD
drive to this unit
13 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] key in front,
and press [4] on the keypad
Memo :
●
The Burn CD/DVD screen appears.
●
●
If no file has been selected from the data list, an error will occur.
If the total volume of the selected data exceeds the available
memory space in the media, an error will occur.
Check Box
Data List
17 When writing is complete, the following
message appears.
Burn CD/DVD Screen
[Erase RW] Button
●
●
To delete the temporary files, select
To write the same data to another CD, select
A
YESB.
ANOB.
[Erase Sel Data] Button
[Burn] Button
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Writing Images/Audio Sound
to CDs, DVDs and Other
Media (Export) (continued)
Writing Data to a USB Memory Device
(Operation on the Unit)
Insert the USB memory device that you wish to export data to into
VR-N1600U/VR-N1600E/VR-N900U, and perform the same
procedures for [Burning a CD/DVD] from Steps 1 to 9. (
1 Specify the export destination
Deleting Temporary Files (Operation on
the Unit)
●
To export to a USB memory device, select [USB].
1 Select the temporary files you want to delete
from the data list.
2 Click the [Erase Sel Data] button
A [YES] or [NO] message asking you whether to delete the selected
data appears. Select YESB.
A
[USB] Check
Button
2
Deleting Data from a CD-RW (Operation on
the Unit)
2 Click [Export]
1 Insert the CD-RW
●
Export begins.
●
The [Erase RW] button is AenabledB.
2 Click the [Erase RW] button
●
A [YES] or [NO] message asking whether you want to
delete data in the RW appears. Select YES
A
B.
Note :
●
You cannot perform other operations while data is being written
to a CD/DVD.
●
Recorded images may be omitted during writing to the CD/DVD
(temporary recording error).
●
●
●
Do not display the Burn CD/DVD screen during export.
Do not connect the CD/DVD drive while a media is inserted.
Do not disconnect the CD/DVD drive while the Burn CD/DVD
screen is displayed.
●
If media is not detected, restart the Burn CD/DVD screen.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Recorded Images
(Operation from a
Surveillance Computer)
Operation from a Surveillance Computer
Follow the same procedures for [Burning a CD/DVD] from Steps 1
1 Specify the export destination
You can print out playback images that are displayed on the screen.
Note :
●
You cannot print directly from this unit. This function is for use by
the [NVR Viewer], which is downloaded onto the surveillance
computer.
1 Double-click the [Print] bar on the [PLAY]
screen.
NVR Viewer
1
2
[Browse] Screen
Memo :
●
You can use the button to the right of the Print bar to display the
screen at one click.
Desktop
Path
Use this to export to the desktop.
Use this to export to a selected folder.
2 Click the [Print...] button in the [Print] section.
●
The [NVR Viewer Survellance Report] screen appears.
2 Click [Export]
●
Export begins.
[User's Note]
3
4
3 Click the [NVR Viewer Survellance Report]
button on the [Page Setup] screen to specify the
printer settings
4 Click the [Print] button to start printing
●
After printing ends, click the [Close] button to close the
print window.
●
Comments entered in [User's Note] are also printed.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Memo :
Recording Camera Images
●
●
●
When recording using signals from the [EXT REC IN] terminal,
the light of the [REC CONTROL] indicator goes off, and the
[REC] indicator appears blinking.
Emergency recording lets you start and stop recording on all
cameras regardless of the [Scheduler...] settings or [Camera
Settings].
Pressing the [REC/STOP] button cancels recording by signals
from the [EXT REC IN] terminal and switches automatically to
Recording Modes
the
A
manual recording mode
B
. The [REC] indicator also
lit mode.
changes from
A
blinking to the
B
A
B
There are four different recording modes.
●
Pressing and holding down the [REC/STOP] button cancels
recording by signals from the [EXT REC IN] terminal and stops
recording.
●
●
●
●
Recording Control Mode
Manual Recording Mode
EXT REC IN Signal Recording Mode
Emergency Recording Mode
Ⅵ
Emergency Recording Mode
Recording starts on all cameras when a MAKE signal is detected by
the [EMERGENCY] terminal of the rear input/output terminal.
Recording is executed in the frame rate specified in [Recording
Ⅵ
Recording Control Mode (
This mode performs recording according to the [Camera Record
Setting].
The [REC CONTROL] indicator lights up.
You can switch the recording control mode on or off by pressing and
holding the [REC CONTROL] button.
Settings]
Recording is only executed during the time specified in [Emergency
-[Desired framerate] of the [Camera Settings] screen.
Emergency recording has priority over the [recording control mode]
or [manual recording] mode.
When emergency recording is complete, the cameras return to the
original recording mode.
●
Set each camera to on/off using the [Scheduler...] settings
Specify the frame rate and conditions for starting recording in
●
Memo :
●
The [REC CONTROL] indicator goes off and the [REC] indicator
appears blinking during emergency recording.
Emergency recording lets you start and stop recording on all
cameras regardless of the [Scheduler...] settings or [Camera
Settings].
Note :
●
●
●
During the interval that is set as offline in [Scheduler...],
recording will not be performed regardless of the [Camera
Settings].
The [REC CONTROL] button is AdisabledB when the main menu
is displayed, when settings are being specified, and during
recording.
●
●
●
Pressing the [REC/STOP] button cancels emergency recording
and switches automatically to the
The [REC] indicator also changes from
mode.
A
manual recording mode
B.
A
blinking to the litB
B
A
When there is an unconnected camera, it may take a while
before the [REC CONTROL] indicator lights up.
Press and hold down the [REC/STOP] button to cancel all
recording modes and stop recording.
Memo :
●
●
●
Press the [REC/STOP] button to cancel the
mode and enable manual recording mode.
Press and hold down the [REC/STOP] button to cancel all
recording modes and stop recording.
Setting [Operate] to ON switches the mode automatically to the
recording control mode . (When the ON at startup checkbox
Arecording control
Note :
B
●
When in the manual recording, [EXT REC IN] signal recording or
emergency recording mode, motion detection and event
recording settings are ignored.
A
B
A
B
A
B
of [Record Control] under [Unit Setting 1] of the main menu is
selected.)
Recording Operation During Power Failure
If a power failure occurs during recording, the system resumes
recording in the mode selected before the power failure after
recovery.
Ⅵ
Manual Recording Mode
The manual recording mode executes recording from all cameras
regardless of the [Camera Record Setting]. Recording is executed
in the frame rate specified in [Recording Settings]
●
In the recording control mode, recording by a motion or event
does not resume unless another motion or event occurs after
recovery from the power failure.
-[Desired
framerate] of the [Camera Settings] screen.
●
The recording control mode returns to the status before the
power failure.
Manual recording lets you start and stop recording on all cameras
by using the [REC/STOP] button. Press the [REC/STOP] button to
start recording. Press and hold down the [REC/STOP] button to
stop recording.
Note :
●
The recorded images may not be played back properly if they
The [REC CONTROL] indicator lights up.
●
It is recommended that an uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
be used to protect the hard disk from damage in the event of a
Ⅵ
[EXT REC IN] Signal Recording Mode
Recording starts on all cameras when the [EXT REC IN] terminal of
the rear input/output terminal is set to MAKE. Recording is executed
in the frame rate specified in [Recording Settings]
framerate] of the [Camera Settings] screen.
Recording using [EXT REC IN] signals has priority over the
recording control mode or manual recording.
power failure. (
●
If a power failure occurs while formatting a hard disk or
archiving, subsequent operations may be affected even when a
UPS is connected.
-[Desired
When recording by the [EXT REC IN] signals is complete, the
cameras return to the original recording mode.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Recording Control Mode
Scheduler Setting
This feature lets you specify when to switch each camera to the
online mode, as well as the online/offline mode of cameras when an
event occurs.
In order to record in the recording control mode, you need to
Memo :
●
●
●
When in the online mode, the camera executes recording
according to the camera record settings.
When in the offline mode, recording is not executed regardless
of the camera record settings.
You can specify the time zone during which e-mail alerts are
triggered when motion is detected. You can also specify the time
1 Press and hold down the [REC CONTROL]
button while camera recording is stopped
([REC] indicator is off).
●
The [REC CONTROL] indicator lights up and the unit
switches to the recording control mode.
Recording will be executed according to the camera
record settings.
zone to activate automatic patrolling (
PTZ cameras.
Page 93) when using
●
●
The minimum unit of time that you can specify is 5 minutes.
Memo :
Note :
●
To stop recording, press and hold down the [REC/STOP] button
●
The online/offline mode has no impact on the manual recording,
during recording in a mode other than recording control (the
[REC] indicator lights up or appears blinking). After the light of
the [REC] indicator goes off, press and hold the [REC
CONTROL] button.
[EXT REC IN] signal recording, and emergency recording
modes.
●
Even when
camera switches to the
remote live requests](
Settings] and live images are displayed on the [NVR Viewer].
During the interval that is set to Offline , recording will not be
performed even when in the Online mode. During the interval
that is set to Event , recording is performed according to the
recording settings when the unit switches to the Online mode.
A
offline
B
or
A
A
Event
Online
Page 106) is specified in [General
B
B
is specified in the scheduler, the
mode if [Start cameras on
●
●
To exit the recording control mode, press and hold down the
[REC CONTROL] or [REC/STOP] button.
Depending on camera status or other circumstances, it may take
a while before recording starts after switching to the recording
control mode.
●
A
B
A
B
A
B
Note :
A
B
●
Do not turn off the power while you are configuring the camera
recording settings.
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
menu
2 Click the [Scheduler...] button
Selecting the Manual Recording Mode
●
The [Scheduler...] screen appears.
1 Press the [REC/STOP] button
●
The unit switches to the manual recording mode and
starts recording from all cameras.
●
The [REC] indicator lights up.
[Scheduler...]
Button
Memo :
●
To exit the manual recording mode, press and hold down the
[REC/STOP] button. Upon doing so, the light of the [REC]
indicator goes off.
●
To clear all recording modes, press and hold down the [REC/
STOP] button.
[REC] Indicator
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
3 Select the camera for which you want to set a
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
schedule from [Camera].
[REC CONTROL] Button/Indicator [REC/STOP] Button
Select a Camera
[Scheduler] Screen
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Memo :
Recording Camera Images
(continued)
●
Selecting the [E-mail], [Patrolling], and [Enable speedup] check
boxes enables you to specify the following settings.
A Enable
Enables you to specify a constant speedup
period regardless of any conditions when
speedup
speedup in [Settings...] is set to
AEnableB
Scheduler Setting (continued)
4 Select [Set] from [Mode]
B E-mail
Enables you to specify the period to send out
the e-mail alert when e-mail alert notification
during a motion is selected (
●
●
The mouse pointer turns into a ApencilB.
C Audio
You cannot select this check box.
Moving the mouse pointer to the day-of-week band in the
calendar section enables you to zoom in/zoom out on the
calendar. To check the detailed schedule, enlarge the day
of week area of the calendar.
D Patrolling
Enables you to specify the patrol scheme and
patrolling period. Select a patrol scheme from
the [Patrol scheme] list, and specify the
corresponding period in the calendar section.
[Patrol scheme] must be defined in advance.
Mode
7 The Schedule Settings window appears
●
Click [On Event] or [Always].
A
B
C
5 Select the [Online] check box
6 Specify the date to switch online in the calendar
A On Event
Switches to the online mode only when an
event occurs. Specify the event in the event
start/stop item.
section
●
Hold down the mouse in the calendar section, and move
the mouse pointer to specify the date.
B Always
C Cancel
Online mode at all time.
Cancels the settings.
●
The selected period is indicated in light blue color.
Memo :
5
●
To clear the period, select [Cancel] from [Mode] at the top left,
select the check box of the item you want to delete ([Online], [E-
mail] or [Patrolling]), and move the mouse pointer while left-
clicking the mouse on the period in the calendar section.
6
A
B
C
D
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Camera/Alert Scheduler Screen
Specifying Image Recording Settings
A
B
C
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
menu
D
[Settings...]
A Copy
Schedule
Enables you to copy the schedule displayed
in the calendar section.
B Paste
Schedule
Pastes the schedule copied using [Copy
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
Schedule]
A
to the selected camera.
C Copy and
Pastes the schedule displayed in the
calendar section to all cameras.
Paste to All
2 Select a camera from [Device Manager] and click
D Close
Exits the [Scheduler...] screen.
[Settings...]
●
●
The [Camera Settings] screen appears.
ⅷ
Display Bar
Specify the setting for each item. (
The display bar indicates the active period for each option ([Online],
[E-mail] and [Patrolling]) in different colors.
● Online Bar
A
B
C
Pink
Indicates the period during which this unit always
displays images of the selected camera.
Yellow
Indicates the period during which images of the
selected camera are displayed when an event is
input to this unit.
● E-mail Bar
Active periods are indicated in blue.
● Patrolling Bar
D
E
Active periods are indicated in gray.
Memo :
F
G
●
The Patrolling Bar is only available when at least one [Patrol
scheme] has been registered in advance. When several patrol
schemes have been registered and are used successively,
changes between the schemes are indicated by a thin vertical
H
●
To check the [Patrol scheme], click the bar of the period to check
in the calendar section. The [Patrol scheme] specified for that
period will appear in the [Patrol scheme] list.
I
L
K
J
[Camera Settings] Screen
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Recording Camera Images
(continued)
Settings
(R: Factory settings)
Item
Preset Values
Description
A Speedup Settings
Frame Rate
^
Enables you to specify the frame rate to acquire from the camera. This is the frame rate
during speedup recording. Specify the frame rates such that the total rate of all cameras
displayed in each view of the [Live Viewing] screen does not exceed 80 ips (image per
second) for VR-N1600U/E, 160 ips for VR-N1600U/E(A) , and 60 ips for VR-N900U.
When playing back the recorded images of VR-N1600U/E(A), set the total display rate to
80 ips or below to display the playback from the main unit and distribution for 13 channels or
more simultaneously.
Note :
●
●
Do not set a value that exceeds the camera’s capacity.
If the frame rate is not specified for the camera, a frame rate that is supported by the
camera is automatically set.
B Live Settings
Frame Rate
Same as recording
● Same sa speedup
Displays the viewing frame rate of the [Live Viewing] screen.
Same sa speedup:
Displays live images using the frame rate specified in the [Speedup Settings] item
Same as recording:
A.
Displays live images using the frame rate specified in the [Recording Settings] item
When speedup is set to ON
detection of motion, the live viewing rate also increases.
E
.
A
B
and the recording frame rate increases such as due to
C Camera
Monitor
Setup
Show Motion
Show Regions
Update on motion only
● Disabled
Select the
A
Disabled
B
checkbox to disable the camera.
Show Regions and Update on motion only cannot be selected.
Memo :
●
AShow Motion
B
,
A
B
A
B
D Audio
Audio1
You can select the audio source to play back when a camera is selected in the NVR Viewer.
You can also specify the audio source in the NVR Viewer if the audio source is included in the
Source
source to be exported in the [Database Export...] format. (
This has no impact on audio recording.
E Recording Settings
Desired
framerate
[none]
Enables you to specify the recording frame rate. You need to specify a value that is larger than
the [Frame Rate] of the [Speedup Settings] item . Specify the frame rates such that the total
A
rate of all cameras displayed in each view of the [Live Viewing] screen does not exceed 80 ips
(image per second) for VR-N1600U/E, 160 ips for VR-N1600U/E(A), and 60 ips for VR-N900U.
Note :
●
See below for the recordable frame rate of each model. Set the total frame rate of all
cameras so that it does not exceed the respective values. When speedup settings are
used, restore the frame rate of the speedup settings to the original value.
●
●
VR-N1600U/E :160 ips or below (When using NAS: 80 ips or below)
VR-N900U(A),(B):120 ips or below (When using NAS: 60 ips or below)
Analog input of VR-N900U(A),(B): 60 ips or below
Analog input of VR-N900U: 20 ips or below
●
●
Recording frame rate may fall below the preset frame rate depending on the signal
processing condition of this unit.
Recording frame rate may deteriorate under the following conditions:
●
●
●
During export
When changing the picture quality of the displayed image
When the total frame rate of the display images (including display on PC) exceeds 80
ips for VR-N1600U/E, 160 ips for VR-N1600U/E(A), and 60 ips for VR-N900U
●
When the frame rate is set to a high value, the recording frame rate may be slightly higher
or lower.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Preset Values
Description
ERecording Settings (continued)
Enable speedup
On motion
On event
Enables you to specify whether to execute recording with a higher maximum frame rate when
motion is detected or when an event occurs.
When [On event] is selected : Specify the starting and ending events in the [Start]
and [Stop] fields respectively.
The speedup recording frame rate uses the [Frame
Rate] in the [Speedup Settings] A item.
When the input is analog
: Values of frame rate that can be set are 30, 15, 10, 7,
6, 5, 3, 2, and 1.
When set to 7, the rate is 7.5 frames per second.
When to store
images in
database
Always
Never
Always
Never
: Select this check box to record images at all times.
: Do not perform recording in the recording control mode. Record
starts when the [REC/STOP] button is pressed.
ⅷ Conditionally
Enables you to specify the recording conditions in recording control mode. If you have
selected [Conditionally], specify the following fields as well.
On motion
: Select this check box to record all images for which motion has been
detected.
On event
: Select this check box to record all images from the occurrence of an
event until the next event occurs regardless of motion. Specify the
starting and ending events in the [Start] and [Stop] fields
respectively.
Memo :
●
For details on events, refer to [Camera Input/Output Port and Events] (
Note :
●
If you have selected [Conditionally], the [ALARM] indicator on the front panel lights up
regardless of the recording status when the motion or event specified in [When to store
images in database] occurs. Press the [ALARM CLEAR] button to turn off the light of the
[ALARM] indicator.
( )seconds pre/post recordings on motion/event:
You can record images preceding and following a detected motion or event. Specify the time
interval to record in the number of seconds before and after the occurrence. (
Memo :
●
●
●
Do not set to A0 secondsB.
If Offline is selected in [Scheduler...], images will not be recorded.
This setting has no impact on manual recording, emergency recording, and [EXT REC IN]
recording.
F Datebase
^
^
Enables you to specify the database settings. (
Settings
G Motion
Detection
Settings
Motion Detection..
Enables you to specify the two parameters for motion detection, namely [Sensitivity] and
Motion Color..
Enables you to specify the color to be used for highlighting detected motion.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Recording Camera Images
(continued)
Settings (continued)
Item
Preset Values
Description
H Exclude
Regions
Settings
^
Enables you to specify the regions to exclude from motion detection. (
Exclude Regions...
Region Color...
Not used.
^
Enables you to specify preset positions and patrolling.
When a configurable camera is selected, this button is displayed to the right of the
[Outputs...] button.
I PTZ Preset
Positions...
J Outputs...
^
^
Enables you to specify output settings. (
K Event
Enables you to select events for triggering event notification. (
Notifications...
L Image Quality...
^
Note :
●
When the recording program (recording server) is operating, the [PTZ Preset Positions...] button is disabled. To stop the recording server
temporarily, press the [Service Manager...] button on the [Camera Record Setting] screen, followed by clicking the [Pause] button.
●
●
●
Video images and audio sound are not recorded when the recording server is temporarily stopped. Display of live images on the surveillance
computer is also turned off.
Even when
the interval when the [Scheduler...] is set to
Clicking [Cancel] does not cancel the picture quality and settings that are specified on another screen.
AAlways
B
is selected under [When to store images in database]
D
in the recording control mode, recording is not executed during
A
B
Setting Picture Quality
Clicking the [Preview Image] button while you are adjusting the
camera settings enables you to view the effect of your settings.
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
menu
2 Select a camera from [Device Manager] and click
[Camera Settings]
●
The [Camera Settings] screen appears.
3 Click [Image Quality...]
●
The [Configure Device] screen appears.
Note :
Example of [Configure Device] Screen
●
It is recommended that you set the picture quality to
Memo :
approximately 24 KB (VGA). Specifying a higher image quality
may affect the sound and cause the frames to be dropped.
●
●
The [Configure Device] screen may vary with cameras.
Refer to the [Instruction Manual] of the respective cameras for
the setting items.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo :
Specifying Audio Recording Settings
●
The audio sound is recorded in the database of the camera
image specified in the [Target Database] item
C.
1
Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main menu
The [Camera Recording Administator] screen appears.
●
Audio sound is recorded throughout the interval when the
scheduler of the camera specified in the [Target Database] item
●
C
is in the online mode.
●
●
In the case of VR-N1600U/E, audio signals that are input to
[AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2] on the rear panel are allocated as
[Audio1] and [Audio2] in [NVR](127.0.0.1) on the [Device
Manager].
In the case of VR-N900U, audio signals that are input to [AUDIO
IN 1/AUDIO IN 2] on the rear panel are allocated as [Audio1] and
[Audio2] in [N900](192.168.201.12) on the [Device Manager].
Note :
●
If the camera specified in the [Target Database] item
Disable , audio sound is not recorded.
C
is set to
A
B
●
To play back audio sound of the camera selected using NVR
Viewer, you need to specify the audio source on the [Settings...]
screen under [Camera Record Setting] (
Precautions when enabling the analog audio
source of VR-N1600U/E
When entering a device for [Target Database] in the [Audio1] and
[Audio2] settings of NVR, make use of an input channel that is
after the channel for recording the audio device of the selected
device.
Memo :
●
You can also specify audio settings using the following
operation.
A
B
Click the [+] mark beside the device with an audio source
(Example)
Select the audio source and right-click on it. Click [Edit] and
specify the settings accordingly on the [Audio Device
Settings] screen.
X VN-E4 Audio1 B E4 Camera2, NVR Audio1 B VN-E4
Camera1
ן VN-E4 Audio1 B E4 Camera1, NVR Audio1 B VN-E4 2
Select an audio source from [Device Manager], and
press the [Settings...] button
Camera2
ן VN-E4 Audio1 B Disable, NVR Audio1 B VN-E4 Camera1
●
●
The [Audio Device Settings] screen appears.
Audio sound is indicated using a microphone icon.
A
B
C
●
Specify the setting for the following items.
Item
Description
Enables/Disables the audio source.
Memo :
A Enabled
●
Right-click on the camera or audio source
in the [Device Manager] section to select
[Disable] or [Edit].
B Device
Displays the name of the audio source. You
can overwrite the existing name with a new
one.
name
C Target
Enables you to specify the camera database
to record audio sound to.
Database
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Recording Camera Images
(continued)
Screen Setup
Renaming Cameras and Assigning Camera
Numbers
Screen Display (Groups and Views)
Multi-view setting for multiple cameras is referred to as [Views]. All
views are placed in folders called [Groups].
1
Select a camera name and right-click on it, followed
by clicking [Edit]
Memo :
●
[Groups] can be private or shared.
●
The Camera Name and Number editing screen appears.
●
[Private] folder:
Views in this folder can only be accessed by the user
who created them.
●
[Shared] folder:
Views in this folder can be accessed by all remote PC
users with access to the system.
[Views] Section
A
B
[Screen Setup]
Screen
[System Overview] Section
Item
Description
[Delete] Button
[Rename] Button
[Create New View] Button
[Create New Group] Button
A Camera Name Displays the name of the camera. You can
overwrite the existing name with a new
one.
B
Camera Number Enables you to specify the camera
Note :
number.
●
The default user setting is AAdministratorB.
●
The Default View created by the Auto Detect feature may
change the camera placement in the view. To maintain a fixed
position, name the view and save it.
When changing the view of the [Shared] folder, the [Save View
Group Error] screen may sometimes appear. In this case, click
the [OK] button to close the screen, log out from the [NVR
Note :
●
Do not assign a camera number that is used by other cameras. If
the camera numbers overlap, the camera may not function
properly.
●
Viewer] once (
Page 126), and log in again to repeat the
procedures for changing the view.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Creating [Views] within a Group
Creating Groups and Views
Ⅵ Creating a Group
1 Select the group in which you want to create a
new view
1 Select [Screen Setup] from the main menu
●
If the [Live] or [Browse] screen is displayed, you can also
click on the [Setup] tab using the mouse.
2 Click the [Create New View] button, and select a
layout for the new view
Select
[Create New View] Button
Main Menu
2 Select the root folder in which you want to
create a new group
View Layouts
●
A new view is created under the group you selected.
[Create New Group] Button
3 Click the [Create New Group] button in the
[Views] section
●
A new group is created.
4 Enter a name for the new group
Note :
●
●
●
Do not display more than 17 windows at any one time.
(VR-N1600U/E)
Do not display more than 10 windows at any one time.
(VR-N900U)
For live images only, VR-N1600U/E(A) can display more than
17 windows.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
2 Click the [Rename] button
Screen Setup (continued)
Creating Groups and Views (continued)
3 Enter a name for the new view
[Rename] Button
3 Overwrite the existing group or view name with
a new name
●
Next, add cameras to the view.
Ⅵ Renaming a Group/View
1 Select the group or view that you want to
rename in the Views section.
Ⅵ Deleting a Group or View
1 Select the group(s) or view(s) that you want to
delete from the Views section.
Select
2 Click the
[Delete] button
A confirmation message appears to ask whether you want to delete
the selected group and all views inside the group, or whether you
want to delete the selected views.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Cameras to a View
Adjusting Camera Settings
1 Select a view
1 Select the camera you want to adjust on the
[Screen Setup] screen
●
The layout of the selected view appears.
2 Select [Properties]
2 Click the [+] mark to the left of [Server] under
[System Overview]
●
A list of available cameras appears.
A
B
2
C
Camera
List
[Screen Setup] Screen
D
[Screen Setup] Screen
[Server]
E
F
G
H
3 Adjust the following camera settings
accordingly
3 Select the camera you want to add from the list,
and drag the camera name over the screen of
the view on the right
Item
Description
A Camera
Displays the name of the selected camera.
(This is a read-only field.)
Name
●
An image from the selected camera appears together with
the camera name.
Repeat the procedure for each camera that you want to
add.
B Image
Enables you to adjust the image resolution
and picture quality during viewing. Select
[Full] at all times.
●
Quality
C Frame Rate
This is the viewing frame rate.
Memo :
Select [Unlimited] (default value; same as
live settings), [Medium] (25 % of the frame
rate), or [Low] (5 % of the frame rate),
depending on the frame rate specified in
●
Images from a total of 16 cameras can be simultaneously
displayed. (VR-N1600U/E)
●
Images from a total of 9 cameras can be simultaneously
displayed. (VR-N900U)
Page 56) on the
[Camera Settings] screen.
D Maintain
Image
If this check box is selected, images will
not be stretched to fit the size of the
display position. Images will be displayed
in the aspect ratio (horizontal to vertical
ratio of the screen) that they have been
recorded.
Aspect
Ration
E Update on
If this check box is selected, the camera’s
images will only be updated on the [Live]
screen when motion is detected.
Motion
F Sound on
Motion
Enables notification with a simple sound
when motion is detected while viewing
images from the camera on the [Live]
screen.
Detection
Always off
Always on
Does not produce sound notification when
motion is detected.
Notifies with a sound each time motion is
detected.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Screen Setup (continued)
Using Your Views on Different Computers
User settings, including the [Private] view, are stored on this unit. In
other words, you can use your [Private] views on any surveillance
computer that has this unit and the
Page 123) by logging in with your own user name and
password.
ANVR ViewerB installed
1 Double-click the [Setup] tab on the NVR Viewer.
Adjusting Camera Settings (continued)
Note :
●
User rights may be configured to restrict access to the [Setup]
tab. In this case, consult your system administrator.
Item
Description
G Sound on Enables notification with a simple alert sound
2 Select the folder you want to use in the [Views]
when events related to the selected camera
occur while viewing images from the camera
on the [Live] screen.
Event
section
●
●
You can create or edit views.
Folders that cannot be edited are indicated by the [LOCK]
icons.
To use this feature, you need to configure the
event notification setting. (
Always off
Always on
Does not output sound alert when an event
related to the camera occurs.
Adding a Carousel
You can use the carousel feature to display images from multiple
cameras in sequence in a single view position. Also, you can set the
time interval for switching the camera to view.
Outputs a sound alert each time an event
related to the camera occurs.
H Apply To
Press this button to apply the new settings to
all cameras.
All
1 Displaying the [Screen Setup] Screen
Note :
●
Set this unit such that the total distribution frame rate to all
surveillance computers does not exceed 80 ips (VR-N1600U/E),
160 ips (VR-N1600U/E(A)), or 30 ips (VR-N900U).
●
The recording frame rate may deteriorate if you change the
picture quality. Changing the [Image Quality] settings may affect
the recording performance. As such, use this function with the
value fixed at AFullB.
●
●
When you drag the timeline browser using the mouse during
playback, the frame rate setting is disabled. [Searching
Notification sound is not output from this unit during motion
detection or occurrence of an event. This function is for use by
the NVR Viewer, which is downloaded onto the surveillance
computer.
4 To adjust the settings on other cameras, repeat
Steps 2 to 3
[Carousel]
Memo :
●
To adjust the settings of all cameras at once, click the [Apply To
All] button. The new camera settings will be applied to all
cameras in the view.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Click and drag the [Carousel] icon in the
[System Overview] section to the position that
you want to set in the view
A
B
C
Item
Description
A Image
Enables you to adjust the image resolution and
picture quality during viewing. Select
all times.
AFullB at
Quality
3 Release the mouse button at the position
B Frame
This is the viewing frame rate.
Select [Unlimited] (default value; same as live
settings), [Medium] (25 % of the frame rate), or
[Low] (5 % of the frame rate), depending on the
frame rate specified in [Live Settings]
Rate
Page 56) on the [Camera Settings] screen.
C Maintain
Image
If this check box is selected, images will not be
stretched to fit the size of the display position.
Images will be displayed in the aspect ratio
(horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen) that
they have been recorded.
Aspect
Ration
Note :
●
The recording frame rate may deteriorate if you change the
picture quality. The [Image] settings may affect the recording
performance. As such, use this function with the value fixed at
A
Full
When you drag the timeline browser using the mouse during
B.
●
A
B
Memo :
4 Select the preset carousel position and specify
●
The green border indicates that the position is used for the
carousel feature.
its properties in the [Properties] section
●
The sequence in which cameras appear in the carousel is
automatically determined by camera and device names. The
cameras appear recurrently in alphabetical order.
●
Begin by selecting the cameras to include in the carousel.
You can also select all cameras on a server at once by
selecting the check box next to the [Server] icon.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operation
Memo :
Screen Setup (continued)
●
●
●
Using the [Hotspot] function enables you to use a low frame rate
for other cameras and a high frame rate for the hot spot.
The orange border indicates that the position is used for a
hotspot.
When the hot spot is set in multiple views and the view is
switched, the camera image displayed in the view before
switching continues to be displayed in the hot spot window in the
view after switching.
Adding Hot Spots (Enlarged Images)
The selected camera within the view is displayed in the hot spot
designated position. Setting the hot spot in a larger position, such
as in [1] of the [1+7] view, displays an enlarged image when the hot
spot is selected.
1 Displaying the [Screen Setup] Screen
2 Click and drag the [Hotspot] icon in the [System
Overview] section to the position that you want
to set in the [Views]
[Screen Setup] Screen
[Hotspot]
3 Release the mouse button at the position
4 Select the preset position in [Hotspot] and
specify its properties in the [Properties] section
Item
Description
A Image
Enables you to adjust the image resolution and
picture quality during viewing. Select
all times.
AFullB at
B Frame
This is the viewing frame rate.
Select [Unlimited] (default value; same as live
settings), [Medium] (25 % of the frame rate), or
[Low] (5 % of the frame rate), depending on the
frame rate specified in [Live Settings]
Rate
Page 56) on the [Camera Settings] screen.
C Maintain
Image
If this check box is selected, images will not be
stretched to fit the size of the display position.
Images will be displayed in the aspect ratio
(horizontal to vertical ratio of the screen) that
they have been recorded.
Aspect
Ration
Note :
●
The recording frame rate may deteriorate if you change the
picture quality. The [Image] settings may affect the recording
performance. As such, use this function with the value fixed at
A
Full
When you drag the timeline browser using the mouse during
B.
●
A
B
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the [Html Page]
Using Still Images (GIF/JPEG files, etc.)
1 Click [Html Page] under [System Overview]
1 Click [Image] under [System Overview]
[Screen Setup] Screen
[Image]
[Screen Setup] Screen
[Html Page]
2 Drag and drop at the required position using the
2 Drag and drop at the required position using the
mouse.
mouse.
●
The [Open] screen appears.
The [Open URL] screen appears.
3 Type in the URL and click [OK]
4 Select [Html Page] under [Views], and specify
the properties in the [Properties] section
[Open] Screen
Item
Description
Url
Click the [New...] button to specify a new URL.
Select the display size of the HTML page.
3 Select the required image file
Note :
Scaling
Enable HTML
scripting
Select this check box to specify HTML files that
contain navigation or trigger functions.
●
When connected to a surveillance computer, still images that are
set on a different computer are not displayed.
●
Still images cannot be added to this unit.
Note :
●
●
●
Pages containing such content as ActiveX and Flash will not be
supported.
Pages containing such content as ActiveX and Flash will not be
supported.
Adding Matrix Content
Select this option to use the Milestone XProtect Matrix feature.
For details, refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User’s
Manual available on the website of Milestone Systems (http://
www.milestonesys.com).
Note that some links may involve security issues.
Memo :
●
The URL address may be subject to changes.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Setting 1
Unit Setting 1 enables you to specify settings related to this unit, including account configuration, error recovery, and serial port configuration.
A
J
B
C
D
I
E
F
G
H
Item
Preset Values
Description
Reference Page
A Password
Enables you to specify the login password for this unit.
Note :
●
Specify the password using numeric characters only.
Current Password
New Password
^
^
^
To change to a new password, enter the [Current Password].
Enter a new password.
New
Enter the new password again for confirmation, and click [Change] to
enable the password change.
Password(reenter)
Auto Logon
● Select check
box
To log in automatically after turning on the power of this unit, select
the [Auto Logon] check box.
Do not select
check box
Change
^
Executes the password change.
B Live viewing
Live viewing Auto ● Select check
Select this check box to display live images automatically when the
system starts up.
box
Start
Do not select
check box
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Unit Setting 1 (continued)
Reference
Page
Item
Preset Values
Description
C Error Report
Enables you to select how you want to be notified when an error is
detected in the system.
^
Dialog
Mail
● Select check box Select [Dialog] to display a warning dialog on the screen.
Do not select
check box
● Select check box Select [Mail] to receive an e-mail notification on any abnormality at
^
the preset e-mail address.
Do not select
check box
Memo :
●
For details on errors, refer to the actions to take when the
[WARNING] indicator lights up. (
D Record Control
^
^
ON at startup
● Select check box Select this check box to turn on the recording control mode when
the system starts up.
Do not select
check box
E Mail Server
^
Enables you to configure the necessary information on the mail
server to be used if you have selected
item
AMailB in the [Error Report]
C.
SMTP Server
Port Number
User ID
Setting for the outgoing mail server.
● 25
^
^
Password
POP Server
Port Number
User ID
Setting for the incoming mail server.
● 110
^
^
Password
SMTP
Authentication
● NONE
Enables you to select the method of user authentication when
sending out a mail. For queries on the settings, consult your system
administrator.
Authentication
POP before SMTP
Send Test Mail
Click to send out a test mail to the address specified in the [Mail
Send List] item
I.
F Emergency Record
Time of Record
NONE
Select the duration of emergency recording, which starts recording
of all channels when a signal is input to the [EMERGENCY]
terminal on the rear panel.
30seconds
● 60seconds
5minutes
Select
AContinueB to continue recording until it is stopped manually
on the front panel.
10minutes
20minutes
Continue
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference
Page
Item
Preset Values
Description
G Serial(VR-N900U)
Lets you specify the settings for the serial ports controlling the
cameras. Please refer to the [Instruction Manual] of the camera in
use to configure the parameters correctly for all settings.
^
Speed
Speed
1800
2400
4800
ⅷ 9600
19200
38400
Data Lenght
Parity
7
ⅷ 8
ⅷ NONE
ODD
EVEN
Stop Bit
ⅷ 1
2
H Encode Mode
Variable File Size
Lets you select the encoding mode for converting analog image
data into digital data. You can choose from the following three
modes.
Specify the encoding size control method and target file size when
encoding JPEG files.
^
(VR-N900U)
ⅷ Average File
Size
Constant File Size
Variable File Size:
The file size increases or decreases depending on the image.
Specify this to maintain a constant image quality.
Memo :
●
Note that maximum recording time varies when recording JPEG
files with this option as the file size increases or decreases.
Average File Size:
Multiple JPEG files are encoded to reach the designated size as
average size.
Constant File Size:
Each JPEG file is encoded to reach the designated size. The
processing load is heavy with AConstant File SizeB, which
decreases the maximum processing frame rate to approximately
one quarter of the value.
Memo :
●
Specify the designated size using the [Quality] bar on the
[Configure Device] screen under [Camera Record Setting].
Interpolate
● Select check box Select this check box to eliminate the comb-shaped noise (noise
that appears jagged) of the moving object. .
Do not select
check box
I Mail Send List
Enables you to specify the mail recipient if you have selected
A
Mail
B
^
^
in the [Error Report] item
C. To add a new recipient, type the e-mail
List
^
^
address in the entry field and click the [Add] button. To remove an e-
mail address from the notification list, select the required e-mail
address in the [List] and click [Delete].
Input
J Close
Closes the [Unit Setting 1] screen.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Unit Setting 2
A
B
C
D
Reference
Page
Item
Preset Values
Description
A HDD meter
Display at startup
Select check box
● Do not select check box
Select this check box to display the HDD meter when the
system starts up.
●
For details on HDD meter, refer to [HDD Meter] (
B Clock setting
Display at startup
Select check box
● Do not select check box
Select check box
● Do not select check box
Select this check box to display the clock when the system
starts up.
Display at date
Select this check box to display the date on the clock.
Display at second
Select check box
Select this check box to display the seconds on the clock.
● Do not select check box
C SNMP setting
Enable of SNMP
Select check box
● Do not select check box
Select check box
● Do not select check box
Select this check box to enable the SNMP function.
Select this check box to enable the TRAP function.
Specify the IP address of the SNMP manager. (IP address)
Enable of TRAP
SNMP manager’s
address
Community name
^
^
Specify the SNMP community name. (1 to 32 characters.
Alphanumeric characters only.)
Confirmationinterval 10 seconds
of alarm
Confirmationinterval 10 seconds
of CPU usage
Confirmationinterval 60 seconds
of D-drive
Confirmationinterval 10 seconds
of NVR Viewer
Specify the interval to monitor the alarm.
(10 to 9999 seconds)
Specify the interval to monitor CPU usage.
(10 to 9999 seconds)
Specify the interval to monitor the writing rate to the D drive.
(30 to 9999 seconds)
Specify the interval to monitor the startup status of NVR viewer.
(10 to 9999 seconds)
Confirmationinterval 60 seconds
of camera
Copy extension MIB onto the flash memory
Specify the interval to monitor connection status of the camera.
(60 to 9999 seconds)
Copy the MIB extension information into a flash memory device.
●
For details on SNMP settings, refer to [Setting SNMP]
D OK/Cancel
^
OK: Exits after entries and the selected content are configured
to the system.
^
Cancel: Exits without saving all entries and selected settings.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OS Setting
Enables you to specify settings related to the OS, including network, time, and volume settings.
You may need to reboot your computer depending on the settings.
B
A
C
D
E
F
Ⅵ Network Adapter
This section enables you to specify settings such as the IP address of this unit. The camera network and Intranet of this unit
are configured with a different IP address. The default address for the camera network is (192.168.0.253), and that for the
Intranet is (192.168.1.253).
There is a common host name for all adapters.
ⅷ When specifying LAN1 (camera network) settings
Item
Preset Values
VR-N1600U/E:
Description
A Network adapter
Settings when you are using LAN1 (camera network).
Intelா 82566DM Gigabit
Network
interface name
VR-N1600U/E(A):
Realtek RTL8168C(P)/
8111C(P) PCI-E
Gigabit Ethernet NIC
VR-N900U:
Realtek RTL8169/8110
Family Gigabit Ethernet
NIC
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
Select check box
● Do not select check
box
IP address
● 192.168.0.253
● 255.255.255.0
● 0.0.0.0
Memo :
●
●
●
To specify an IP address other than the default value, consult your system
administrator.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
If the host name is changed, you need to add a new Windows user in [User
Administration] under [Image Server Setting]. (
Do not set the default gateway for both the camera network and Intranet on the
[OS Setting] screen. Doing so may cause the system to malfunction.
Perferred DNS
Server
● 0.0.0.0
Alternate DNS
Server
● 0.0.0.0
Host Name
VR-N1600U/E :vr-n1600
VR-N900U
:vr-n900
DNS Domain
Name
● 0.0.0.0
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
OS Setting (continued)
ⅷ When specifying LAN2 (Intranet) settings
Item
Preset Values
Description
VR-1600/VR-N900:
Settings when you are using LAN2 (Intranet).
Intelீ8225xER PCI
ANetwork adapter
interface name
(continued)
Adapter
VR-N1600U/E(A):
Realtek RTL8168C(P)/
8111C(P) PCI-E Gigabit
Ethernet NIC#2
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
Select check box
● Do not select check
box
IP address
● 192.168.1.253
● 255.255.255.0
● 192.168.1.254
● 0.0.0.0
Memo :
●
●
●
To specify an IP address other than the default value, consult your system
administrator.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
If the host name is changed, you need to add a new Windows user in [User
Administration] under [Image Server Setting]. (
Do not set the default gateway for both the camera network and Intranet on
the [OS Setting] screen. Doing so may cause the system to malfunction.
Perferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
● 0.0.0.0
Host Name
VR-N1600U/E :vr-n1600
VR-N900U
:vr-n900
DNS Domain Name
^
ⅷ When specifying analog camera network settings (VR-N900U only)
Item
Preset Values
Description
ANetwork adapter
interface name
(continued)
Enc Board Bus Master
Driver
Settings when you are using an analog camera network.
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
Select check box
● Do not select
check box
IP address
● 192.168.201.253
● 255.255.255.0
● 0.0.0.0
Memo :
●
●
●
To specify an IP address other than the default value, consult your system
administrator.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
If the host name is changed, you need to add a new Windows user in [User
Administration] under [Image Server Setting]. (
Do not set the default gateway for both the camera network and Intranet on the
[OS Setting] screen. Doing so may cause the system to malfunction.
Perferred DNS
Server
● 0.0.0.0
Alternate DNS
Server
● 0.0.0.0
Host Name
● vr-n900
DNS Domain Name
^
Note :
●
In VR-N900U, analog input circuitry is considered as a network encoder (IP video server) and the IP address is set to
A192.168.201.12
B
by
default.
●
The IP address of the analog camera network for VR-N900U is set to
may cause the system to malfunction.
A192.168.201.253B by default. Do not change the IP address. Doing so
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Other Settings
Item
Preset Values
Description
B Day and Time Properties
To synchronize the time with the Internet time server or to specify the date and
time manually, click [Update Now].
Automatically
Select check box
Select this check box to synchronize the time with the Internet time server.
synchronize with an
Internet server
● Do not select
Note :
check box
●
●
●
●
You cannot specify the date and time manually when this box is selected. The
settings in the boxes cannot be changed.
The date and time properties are not enabled until you have clicked the
[Update Now] button.
Changing the time setting may prevent normal playback of recordings made at
the same time as a result.
Changing the
A
TimeB field of the time setting when operations are in progress
may prevent normal display of live images. In this case, reboot this unit.
Server
^
^
Enter the address of the Internet time server.
Note :
●
Connect the time server to the LAN2 network.
NTP Polling Interval
For specifying the time interval (in minutes) for synchronizing with the Internet
time server.
Date
Time
Enter this field when you are specifying the date manually.
Memo :
●
●
●
The [Day and Time Properties] settings are not enabled until you have clicked
the [Update Now] button.
Changing the time setting may prevent normal playback of recordings made at
the same time as a result.
^
Changing the AhourB value of the hour/minute/second setting when operations
are in progress may prevent normal display of the live images. In this case,
reboot this unit.
Time Zone
● VR-1600U:
(GMT-05:00)
Eastern Time
● VR-1600E:
(GMT) Greenwich
Mean Time
For specifying the time zone.
Note :
●
●
●
Make sure that the date and time that you specify does not overlap with any
previous recorded data.
If the specified time zone is incorrect, the system may not run at the correct
time after synchronizing with the Internet time server.
When the time zone is altered, press the [LIVE/BROWSE] while holding down
the [FUNCTION] button to reboot the NVR Viewer.
C Volume Properties
Device Volume
● Center position
Adjust the volume using the slider bar.
D LOAD configuration
E SAVE changes
^
^
Reads the preset configuration files and displays them on the screen.
Exits after entries and the selected content are configured to the system.
Manual update of time is disabled. To update the time manually, go to the [Day
and Time Properties] item
C.
F CANCEL changes
^
Exits without saving all entries and selected settings.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Image Server Setting
This section enables you to specify settings for connecting this unit to a computer, and for displaying the [Live] and [Browse] screens.
The distribution settings are also applied to operation on the [Live], [Browse], and [Screen Setup] screens of this unit.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Preset Values
Description
A Server Configuration
Enables you to specify the server name, port number, and details on external access
to the server.
Name
Port
● Server
● 80
For specifying the server name.
For specifying the port number to use for the server.
Enable Outside IP
Address
Select check box
Select this check box to enable access to this unit from a surveillance computer
connected to the Internet via the router or firewall.
If you have selected this option, specify the global IP address in the [IP address]
column for the Internet router or firewall, and the port number in the [Port] column for
access to the Internet by the surveillance computer.
● Do not select
check box
You have to configure an appropriate port forwarding on the router or firewall to allow
access by a surveillance computer that is connected to the Internet.
For details, refer to the “Instruction Manual” of the respective devices.
Outside
address
^
For specifying the global IP address or host name when connecting to this unit via the
Internet.
Outside Port
^
^
For specifying the port number to use when connecting to this unit via the Internet.
Local IP Ranges...
Settings for using the Master/Slave feature by Milestone Systems.
For specifying the beginning of the IP address range in the left field on the screen,
and the end of the IP address range in the right field. Click the [Add] button.
You may define as many local IP address ranges as required.
Memo :
●
●
You may specify only one IP address. (Example: 192.168.10.1 to 192.168.10.1)
For details, refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User’s Manual available
on the website of Milestone Systems (http://www.milestonesys.com).
The URL address may be subject to changes.
●
Max,number of
clients
● 11
For specifying the maximum number of NVR Viewer users allowed for connection at
any one time. The number of users also includes the use of the [NVR Viewer] on the
[Live] and [Browse] screens of this unit. Do not set a number of larger than 11.
B User
This section describes procedures to configure user accounts and rights.
Administration
User Setup...
^
Click this button to display the [User Administration] screen for setting the [User] and
Memo :
●
After adding a new user, a small square appears to the top left of the icon on the
[User Administration] screen. You can distinguish between [Add Basic User...] and
[Add Windows User...] using this mark when the same user name is registered
with both.
User
VR-N1600U/E:vr-n1600
VR-N900U:vr-n900
Type:Basic user
Password:vr-n1600(VR-N1600U/E), vr-n900(VR-N900U)
Administrator
Type: Windows or Active Directory user or Active Director User
Password: Nil
Add Basic
User...
^
You can create a dedicated user account for the surveillance system through
authentication of the user name and password.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Image Server Setting (continued)
Item
Preset Values
Description
B User Administration (continued)
User Setup... (continued)
Add Windows
User...
^
Do not select this option. For details, consult your system administrator.
Note :
●
When the host name in the OS settings is changed, enter [Administrator] in [Enter
the object names to select] on the [Serect Users or Groups] screen, and click the
[Advanced...] button. Next, click the [OK] button.
●
Windows users need to define a Windows user for each host name specified in
[Host Name] in [OS Setting]. (
As the user’s host name is not displayed on the [User Administration]
screen, it is recommended that you delete the Windows user and add
Delete
^
^
Deletes a preset user.
Select the user to delete from the [Current isers/groups] list, and click the [Delete]
button. The user that has been deleted from the list is no longer able to login to NVR
Viewer.
Change
password...
Enables you to edit a preset user name and password.
Select the user to edit from the [Current isers/groups] list, and click the [Change
password...] button.
Define Username ● Full access for all
[Full access for all users]:
users
and Password
Select this option to grant all users access to all NVR Viewer features and cameras.
[Restrict user access]:
Restrict user access
Select this option to restrict users’ access. Then click the [User Access...] button to
define access right for each user.
Memo :
●
For details on access rights, refer to [Defining User Rights] (
C Master/Slave Setup
Designate as
Master Server
Select check box
Select this check box to use this unit as the master server. When multiple
units of slave servers are registered to the master server, multiple units of
NVR cameras can be mixed and displayed on the NVR viewer.
● Do not select
check box
Pre-6.0 Version
Slaves
Select check box
This check box is always not selected.
● Do not select
check box
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
D Log Files
Days to log
E Audit Log
Preset Values
Description
Log information may be required for diagnosing troubles.
● 10
For specifying the number of days for storing the event log in the [Image Server Setting].
Enables you to configure log file settings related to client computer users.
Enable Audit
Logging
Select check box
● Do not select
check box
Days to log
● 30
For specifying the number of days for storing the audit log files.
For specifying the minimum time interval for acquiring logs.
Minimum Logging
Interval
^
In Sequence
Timespan
^
For specifying the maximum viewing time interval that is to be considered as the same
sequence.
Enables you to select the available languages. Select a language (local character set) for
the camera name, user name, and password. Select the language of your choice.
F Language Support and XML Encoding
Language
Traditional Chinese (Big5)
Japanese (euc-jp)
Simplified Chinese (GB2312)
Central,Eastern European
(ibm852)
Cyrillic (ibm866)
● Western(European)(iso-8859-1)
Thai(iso-8859-11)
Central,Eastern European (iso-
8859-2)
Southern European (latin) (iso-
8859-3)
Baltic (iso-8859-4)
Cyrillic (iso-8859-5)
Arabic (iso-8859-6)
Greek (iso-8859-7)
Hebrew (iso-8859-8)
Turkish (iso-8859-9)
Korean (ks_c_5601-1987)
Japanese (shift-jis)
Universal(UTF7) (utf-7)
Universal(UTF8) (utf-8)
Central,Eastern European
(windows-1250)
Cyrillic (windows-1251)
Western(European) (windows-
1252)
Greek (windows-1253)
Hebrew (windows-1255)
Arabic (windows-1256)
Baltic (windows-1257)
Vietnamese (windows-1258)
Thai (windows-874)
Japanese (_iso-2022-jp$ESC)
Memo :
●
The settings for [Days to log] under [Image Server Setting]
-[Log Files] (Item
C) as well as [Days to log] under [Audit Log] (Item
D) are
disabled.
●
[Camera Record Setting]
-[General Settings]
-
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Auto Detect Setting
This section enables you to assign an IP address to each camera and configure various auto detect settings.
For procedures on using the Auto Detect feature, refer to [Auto Detect Settings] (
A
E
B
C
D
F
G
T VR-N900U only
Reference
Page
Item
Preset Values
Description
A IP Lease
For configuring the function to assign IP addresses to each
network camera.
ⅷ Enable
Disable
Memo :
● In order to assign an IP address of the network camera
using the IP Lease feature, you need to enable the DHCP of
the network camera. For procedures to enable the DHCP of
the network camera, refer to the [INSTRUCRTIONS] of the
network camera.
● If a network uses a multiple number of this product, enable
[IP Lease] only for one unit. Select ADisableB if a DHCP
server is operating on the same network. When the [IP
Lease] is enabled for two or more devices at the same time,
the IP address may change to a static address, and cause
malfunction of the cameras.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B IP Lease Parameter
^
Start Address
● 192.168.0.100
For specifying the first IP address to be assigned to the
cameras.
Unit
● 20Units
For selecting the number of IP addresses to be assigned to the
cameras. The selected number of IP addresses will be
assigned starting from the first IP address.
1Unit to 99Units
Subnet Mask
Gateway
● 255.255.255.0
● 192.168.0.254
For specifying the subnet mask for the cameras.
For specifying the gateway for the cameras.
DNS Server
Primary
● 192.168.0.253
● 192.168.0.252
^
For specifying the primary DNS for the cameras.
For specifying the secondary DNS for the cameras.
For specifying the domain name for the cameras.
Secondry
Domain Name
C Lease Time Limit ● No
For specifying the valid period of the IP address assigned to
the cameras.
If AYesB is selected, you can set the lease time in units of hours.
(Setting value: 1 hour to 99 hours)
^
^
Yes
D Client
● Only Camera
For selecting whether to apply restrictions on the device when
assigning the IP address. If AOnly CameraB is selected, IP
address will only be assigned to the corresponding camera. If
AAny ClientB is selected, IP address will be assigned to all
devices.
Any Client
E IP Information
^
The [IP Information] list contains information on the [IP
number of video CH, manufacturer, and model.
Click [Auto Detect] to start auto detect and display the result.
The camera at the top of the list is used with priority.
You can click the Sort button to sort the order of detected
cameras.
There are five types of sort buttons, including Sort by [IP], Sort
by [MAC], Sort by [CH], Sort by [MAKER], and Sort by
[MODEL] buttons.
Select the detected cameras, followed by clicking the [Up] or
[Down] button to change the order of the cameras.
Deselect the check box of any camera that you are not using.
After doing so, click [Entry]-[OK]. The [Autodetect Device]
screen appears. After entering the camera password, the
[Camera Record Setting] screen appears. Clicking [Close]
automatically creates a Default View. To save this view, change
its name.
Memo :
● When multicast packets are configured such that they do not
pass through the network equipment, such as a switching
hub, the Auto Detect of the camera may not function
properly.
● [Analog-in] is the built-in analog input of VR-N900U. The
highest priority is given to the number of CH used during
configuration. (VR-N900U)
● Devices other than the cameras may appear in the list.
Uncheck the boxes of these devices.
Note :
● Deselecting the [Analog-in] check box disables the [ALARM
IN 1 to 4] signal input terminal at the rear of the unit.
(VR-N900U)
F Reserve MAC
^
^
Configure the [Reserve MAC Address] if you want to assign a
specific IP address to the cameras. A specific IP address is
always mapped to a MAC address. Enter a value in the [MAC]
and [IP] fields, and click [Add] to set the addresses. To cancel
the setting, select a displayed MAC and IP address, and click
[Del].
^
^
Address
G OK/Cancel
Clicking this button closes the setup screen, and starts/stops
the IP address assignment function according to the settings.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Note :
●
When the ADo not detect in the future.B check box on the [Detect
Device] screen is selected during automatic detection, the
[Detect Device] screen of the said camera will not appear during
subsequent automatic detection operations. You can add the
camera manually to enable its detection again. [Adding
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Main Menu List (continued)
Reference
Page
Item
Description
A Service Manager...
Pressing the [Service Manager...] button opens a small [Service Manager] screen, which
enables you to pause/resume the Recording Server recording program.
A
A
Use this feature when you need to pause the program, such as when configuring PTZ
cameras.
B Scheduler...
Displays the [Scheduler...] screen.
Displays the [General Settings] screen.
Displays the [Archive Setup] screen.
Not used.
^
C General Settings...
D Archive Setup...
E Import DLKs...
F Matrix...
Settings for using the Milestone XProtect Matrix by Milestone Systems.
Memo :
^
●
For details, refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart Client User’s Manual available on
the website of Milestone Systems (http://www.milestonesys.com).
The URL address may be subject to changes.
●
G Transact...
H Exit
Not used.
^
^
Closes the [Camera Recording Administator] screen.
I Device Manager
Displays the list of all added devices and connected cameras, which provides you with a
summarized view of the surveillance system.
^
J Add Device...
K Edit Device...
L Remove Device
Starts the [Device Setup Wizard].
^
Displays the [Edit device settings] screen.
For deleting a device selected in the [Device Manager] section
I.
Note :
●
If you remove the device, you will not be able to view recorded images. Do not delete
devices that are needed to view recorded images subsequently. In this case, select
screen. To view recorded images, cancel Disabled in [Camera Monitor Setup].
A
B
A
B
M Settings...
For specifying the recording settings for a selected camera or settings for a selected
audio device.
N I/O Setup...
Displays the [I/O Setup] screen.
Displays the [Event Buttons] screen.
Displays the [Generic Events] screen.
Displays the [I/O Control] screen.
O Event Buttons...
P Generic Events...
Q I/O Control...
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Installation
This section enables you to install camera drivers and additional softwares.
A
B
C
Item
Description
A Information on additional
Insert the flash memory device with the additional software saved in the root folder and select Optional
Installation. The additional software will appear in the list.
softwares
B Install
C Close
Select the additional software and click [Install]. The installer starts up and the software is installed.
Closes the [Optional Installation] window .
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Note :
Adding Cameras
●
The
Ahttp port 80
B
followed by AFTP port 21B are used by
default. To use a different port, click [Port Setup] and specify the
required port numbers. You may need to specify a different port
if the device is located behind a NAT router or firewall. In this
case, configure the router or firewall so that it maps the ports
and IP address used by the device.
To specify settings on camera connection, you first need to add the
required devices, such as network cameras or network encoders
(IP video servers), to the system. Devices have their own IP
addresses and host names. The system identifies the devices
based on their IP address or host name.
4 If an administrator password is specified for the
device, enter the password
●
●
The password is usually set to [root] or [admin].
Click [Next] without specifying [Autodetect Device].
Memo :
5 Enter a unique name for the device that has
●
Even though each device is managed using a unique IP address
or host name, in cases such as when multiple analog cameras
are connected to a network encoder (IP video server), a multiple
number of cameras may be connected to a single device and
thus share the same IP address or host name. Although several
cameras are connected to one device in this case, this unit
manages the cameras on an individual basis.
been detected
●
The device is listed in the [Device Manager].
6 Click [Finish]
●
To view the list of cameras connected to the device, click
the plus (+) sign to the left of the device name.
●
●
In addition to the network camera and network encoder (IP video
server), you can also add a number of dedicated I/O (input/
output) devices to the system. You can configure and use the
event settings for the I/O devices in the same way as cameras.
When a device is added to the system, it is listed on the [Camera
Recording Administator] screen. To add a new device, follow the
procedure below. Firstly, configure the IP address and password
of the device according to instructions in the camera manual.
You cannot add a camera for which there is user access
restriction. For details on access restrictions, refer to the
camera’s “Instruction Manual”.
Memo :
●
The camera names are set as [Camera1], [Camera2],
[Camera3], [Camera4], …etc. by default. To change the name of
a camera, select the device and click the camera name.
The camera number increases in sequence as new cameras are
added.
●
●
Registration of the cameras can also be performed
●
●
If the camera is registered with the user access restriction set to
ON, the camera is registered with access restriction and unable
to display live images unless the settings are changed.
Analog Cameras (VR-N900U)
In VR-N900U, analog input circuitry is considered a network
encoder (IP video server), and the IP address is set to
192.168.201.12.
This is registered as A[N900](192.168.201.12)B on the Device
Manager of the [Camera Record Setting] screen. Cameras
connected to the [VIDEO IN1 to 4] input terminal at the rear
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
menu
2 Click [Add Device...]
correspond to Cameras 1 to 4 of
name N900 using the [Edit Device...] button. However, the IP
address 192.168.201.12 cannot be changed.
AN900B. You can alter the default
●
The [Device Setup Wizard] screen appears.
A
B
A
B
3 Enter the IP address or DNS host name that can
be identified by the system
Memo :
●
Audio signals that are input to [AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2] on the
rear panel are allocated as [Audio1] and [Audio2] in
[N900](192.168.201.12) on the [Device Manager].
●
To enter the DNS host name, select the [Use DNS host
name] check box and click [Next].
Adding an Analog Camera (VR-N900U)
To add an analog camera manually when using VR-N900U, specify
A192.168.201.12B as the IP address on the [Edit device settings]
screen. As no password has been specified, leave the password
entry field blank and continue to the next step.
Analog cameras are already added on VR-N900U by default.
[Device Setup Wizard] Screen
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The following items can be specified.
Item Description
Editing Device Settings
A Identify Video Device
Device Type For selecting the type of device from the list.
Detect
Device
Click this button to enable automatic
detection of the device type and serial
number.
This section describe the procedures to edit the settings of added
devices.
Device Name Name used to identify the device. You cannot
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
assign the same name to multiple devices.
menu
Camera
Displays the camera setting screen.
●
The [Camera Recording Administator] screen appears.
Settings...
DeviceSerial Serial number of the device. The 12-
character MAC address of the device is
normally used.
Number
B Network Settings for Video Device
IP-address
IP address or DNS host name of the device.
Use DNS
host name
Select this check box to identify the device
using the DNS host name instead of its IP
address.
Default Http
Port
Select this check box to allow HTTP traffic to
the device through the default port (Port 80).
To use another port, deselect the check box
and specify the port number in the field to the
left of the check box.
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
Default Ftp
Port
Select this check box to allow FTP traffic to
the device through the default port (Port 21).
To use another port, deselect the check box
and specify the port number in the field to the
left of the check box.
2 Select a device in the [Device Manager] section,
and click the [Edit Device...] button
Root
Password
Enter the password for logging into the
device using the root account (also known as
Admin or Administrator account).
●
The [Edit device settings] screen appears.
Memo :
●
If you are using VN-C625U/VN-C655U,
an error message does not appear if you
have entered a wrong password and
clicked OK, but access to the camera may
fail, such as not being able to view the live
images.
A
C OK/Cancel
Confirms or cancels the settings.
B
C
[Edit device settings] Screen
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
PTZ Camera Settings
(COM1/COM2)
The [Camera Settings] screen enables you to specify of the information on cameras. The number of configurable parameters available on the
[Camera Settings] screen may be limited if the camera does not come with the PTZ features or if the device connected to the network encoder
(IP video server) is not a camera.
To display the [Camera Settings] screen, click the [Camera Settings...] button on the [Edit device settings] screen.
A
B
C
[Camera Settings]
D
E
F
G
Item
Description
A PTZ Camera Section
Some of the
connected
Select this check box if any of the cameras connected to the network encoder (IP video server) is a PTZ camera.
If the PTZ features are not available on the device, the check box is disabled.
cameras are Pna/
Tilt/Zoom cameras
P/T/Z type
For selecting a control method that conforms with the PTZ camera from the list if the PTZ camera is controlled
controlled through through the COM1 or COM2 port of the network encoder (IP video server).
COM1/COM2
If all the PTZ cameras are not controlled through the COM1 or COM2 port, select
ANoneB.
B Camera List
On the camera list, the camera numbers on the device are listed in sequence.
For example, the top line corresponds to camera number 1, and the second line corresponds to camera number 2,
and so on.
To change the camera settings, select a camera number from the list, specify the required information in the following
fields, and click the [Apply] button.
C Camera Name
Name used to identify the selected camera. Do not assign a camera name that is used by other devices.
Note :
●
The “Camera Name” is not the name specified for the camera unit, but for identifying the camera on this unit.
D Camera
For specifying the camera number.
Number
Note :
●
Do not assign a camera number that is used by other cameras.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E Camera Type For specifying whether the camera corresponding to the selected number is [Fixed] or [Moveable].
Fixed
: Fixed Camera
: PTZ Camera
Moveable
F Device Port
G Port Addr.
This option is enabled only if
For specifying which control port on the network encoder (IP video server) to use for controlling the PTZ features.
A
Moveable
B
is selected in the [Camera Type] item
E.
This option is enabled only if Moveable is selected in the [Camera Type] item
Use this option to specify the port address of the camera. The port address is usually set to
A
B
E.
A0
B
or
A1B.
If the PTZ cameras are serially connected, they are identified by their the port addresses. Refer to the camera’s
[INSTRUCRTIONS] for the recommended settings.
[CAMERA CONTROL] Terminal at the Rear
of VR-N900U (VR-N900U)
The analog camera acts as a network encoder (IP video server) in
the VR-N900U system, and the device name assigned to it is
[N900]. The [CAMERA CONTROL] terminal at the rear is assigned
as
A
COM1
B
on the Camera Settings screen.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Defining a Preset PTZ
Position
Display the [PTZ Preset Positions for
Device Name] Window
The [PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] window lets you define
preset positions for the PTZ cameras.
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
menu
Stopping the Recording Server
Stop the recording server before defining the PTZ camera settings.
2 Select a camera from [Device Manager] and click
[Settings...]
1 Select [Camera Record Setting] from the main
menu
1
2
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
Main Menu
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
2 Click the [Service Manager...] button
The [Service Manager] screen appears.
[Camera Settings] Screen
[PTZ Preset Positions...] Button
Note :
●
The preset position may be displaced by a few degrees for some
cameras.
[Service Manager...] Screen
3 Click the [Pause] button
Note :
●
Video images and audio sound are not recorded when the
recording server is temporarily stopped. Display of live images
on the surveillance computer is also turned off.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The following configuration options are available in the
[PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] window.
3 Click the [PTZ Preset Positions...] button
●
The [PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] window
appears.
Item
Description
A PTZ View
For moving the PTZ camera to the desired
position. You can check the position on the
screen.
B Preset
For registering, deleting and testing a PTZ
camera position.
Positions
Use preset
positions from
device
This is only applicable to cameras that
support this feature.
Select this check box to use preset
positions defined by the camera or network
encoder (IP video server).
A
Note :
●
To import preset PTZ positions from a device, the
preset PTZ positions of this unit first has to be deleted.
Note that by doing this you will lose all information on
the preset PTZ positions in this unit.
B
Memo :
●
In order to use preset positions from the camera or
C
D
network encoder (IP video server) on, the names of the
preset positions must contain only alphanumeric
characters (space is not allowed). Preset positions with
names that contain blank characters cannot be
imported.
[PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] Window
Set Position
Registers the position specified in [PTZ
View] as the preset position selected in the
list.
Note :
●
When using VN-C625U/VN-C655U, the preset position cannot
be registered if electronic zoom feature of camera is functioning.
Please take note that no error message will be displayed in such
case. During PTZ preset setting, turn off electronic zoom in the
following operations to prevent registration by mistake.
Edit Name...
Test
For editing the preset position name
selected in the list.
For testing a defined preset position. Select
the preset position from the list, and click
the [Test] button. The result is displayed
immediately in [PTZ View].
●
From [PTZ page] of VN-C625U/VN-C655U, set [EZoom
Limit] to . For details, refer to [INSTRUCRTIONS] of
VN-C625U/VN-C655U.
A1B
Delete
For deleting the preset position selected in
the list.
J
/K
For moving a preset position selected in the
list upward or downward.
C Preset
Position on
For specifying settings to move the PTZ
camera to a preset position when an event
occurs.
Events
D Patrolling
For configuring PTZ patrolling.
Note :
●
The configurable items may differ according to the camera in
use.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Defining a Preset PTZ
Position (continued)
Moving to Preset Positions by Events
This feature enables the PTZ camera to move automatically to a
preset position when an event occurs.
1 Display the [PTZ Preset Positions for Device
2 Select the [Goto preset on event] check box
Defining a Preset Position
under [Preset Position on Events]
1 Display the [PTZ Preset Positions for Device
3 Click the [Setup...] button
2
3
[PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] Window
[PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] Window
4 Select a preset position from the [Available
2 Move the camera and determine the position
Preset Positions] list
using the [PTZ View]
5 Select an event from [Available Events]
3 Select an item in the [Preset Positions] list to
register the preset position to.
6 Click the [
] button
●
The position at the top of the list corresponds to Preset
Position 1.
●
Doing so copies the selected event to the list on the right.
This list shows events that are assigned by the selected
preset position.
●
The number of preset positions that can be registered
may differ according to the camera in use.
4
5
6
4 Click the [Set Position] button and name the
preset position
Memo :
●
To remove the association between a preset position and an
event, select the event from the list on the right and click the
button.
5 To define another preset position, repeat Steps
2 to 4
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
A New
Description
Auto PTZ Patrolling
PTZ patrolling is a feature that enables automatic movement of a
PTZ camera between several preset positions.
For adding a new patrol scheme to the
[Patrol scheme] list.
B Copy
For creating a new patrol scheme based on
an existing one. Select the patrol scheme to
copy in the [Patrol scheme] list beforehand.
1 Display the [PTZ Preset Positions for Device
C Rename
D Remove
For changing the name of an existing patrol
scheme. Select the patrol scheme to rename
in the [Patrol scheme] list beforehand.
For deleting an existing patrol scheme.
Select the patrol scheme to delete in the
[Patrol scheme] list beforehand.
3 Select the preset positions you want to use in
the [Preset Positions] list, and click the [
button.
]
●
●
●
Doing so copies the selected preset positions to the
[Patrolling list].
A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol
scheme.
The camera will move between the preset positions in the
sequence shown in the [Patrolling list], starting from the
top position.
●
●
To change the sequence of preset positions in the
[Patrolling list] list, select a preset position name, and click
the Up/Down buttons.
[PTZ Preset Positions for Device Name] Window
To remove a preset position from the [Patrolling list], select
the preset position and click the
button.
2 Click the [Setup...] button of [Patrolling]
●
The [Setup PTZ Patrolling] screen appears.
A
B
C
D
3
[Setup PTZ Patrolling] Screen
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Ⅵ PTZ Patrolling Actions Upon Detection of Motion
Defining a Preset PTZ
Position (continued)
1 Select the [Disable patrolling schedule if motion
is detected] check box
Auto PTZ Patrolling (continued)
Ⅵ Specifying Patrol Timing
1 Select the patrol scheme that you want to define
from the [Patrol scheme] list
2 Specify the duration (seconds) for the PTZ
camera to stop at each preset position in the
[Stay at each position in the patrol schedule(in
seconds)] field
2 Select the conditions for resuming PTZ
patrolling
3 Specify the time required for the PTZ camera to
move between two preset positions in the [Time
for each PTZ camera movement to complete(in
seconds). Motion detection is disabled during
movement.] field
●
When a specific time interval has lapsed after the first
detected motion, regardless of whether any subsequent
motion is detected
When a specific time interval has lapsed after the last
detected motion
●
3 Specify the selected condition in units of
seconds
Ⅵ PTZ Scanning
For cameras that support PTZ scanning, you can enable this
feature in the [Setup of PTZ Scanning] section to select a PTZ
scanning speed.
Note :
●
To define a patrol scheme, you must specify at least two preset
positions. You must also specify the period for which the patrol
scheme is enabled in [Camera Record Setting]-[Scheduler...].
[Setup PTZ Patrolling] Screen
●
Patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted either manually or
when an event occurs. When this occurs, you need to specify the
duration (seconds) before resuming patrol in [Camera Record
Setting]-[General Settings]-[Patrolling Settings]. The settings in
this section are applied to all PTZ cameras installed in the
system. The default setting is 30 seconds.
Memo :
●
In order not to generate false motion alarms, motion detection
and recording are automatically disabled when the PTZ camera
is moving between two preset positions. After the lapse of the
specified interval, motion detection is automatically enabled
again.
Note :
●
It is important that the camera is able to reach all the preset
positions defined in the patrolling scheme within the time interval
you have specified. Otherwise, false motion may be detected.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Camera Input/Output Port
and Events
A Add new
For specifying input events for the device
selected in the [Defined events] list. You
may be able to specify multiple input
events for some devices.
event...
Click the [+] mark next to the device in the
[Defined events] list, select the preset
input event, and click the [Add new
event...] button to specify a timer event.
The input/output port is the input/output terminal that is found on
each device registered with this unit. You can register the input port
as [Input events], and the output port as [Outputs...].
Displays the [Add new output] screen.
A registered input/output port can be linked to an event as
B Add new
described below. (
output event...
C Add VMD
Event(Motion
●
Events can be used to start recording, send e-mails, move the
For specifying a VMD (Video Motion
Detection) event for the device selected in
the [Defined events] list. Only one VMD
event can be defined for each camera.
PTZ camera to a preset position, and control the output port of
the device. Events are divided into the four types as described
below.
Detection)
Input events
Registers input signals of sensors connected
to the input port of the device as an [Input
events].
Note :
●
To avoid the risk of generating an
excessive number of VMD events, a
new VMD event cannot occur within
five seconds after the occurrence of
the last VMD event.
Generic events
VMD events
Registers as a generic event.
Registers the detected image motion as a
VMD (Video Motion Detection) event.
●
VMD events cannot be sent by e-mail.
Event buttons
Event generated by buttons that enable
manual operation.
D Advanced...
Displays the [Advanced...] screen.
E Remove
For deleting the event selected in the
[Defined events] list.
I/O Settings
selected
1 Click the [I/O Setup...] button on the [Camera
F Edit
For editing the event selected in the
[Defined events] list.
selected...
Record Setting] screen
●
●
The [I/O Setup] screen appears.
Note :
The [I/O Setup] screen enables you to add input events,
VMD events and outputs that can be used by the network
cameras.
●
The available events differ among network cameras.
●
When an event is defined using the [I/O Setup] screen, this
automatically overwrites the alarm settings at the camera. If a
generic event is already in use (when the alarm settings at the
camera are configured manually), the generic event or the event
audio that makes use of the generic event (
Page 129) will be
disabled. However, the generic event settings at the recorder
unit remain unchanged. (VR-N1600U/E)
A
F
E
B
C
D
[I/O Setup] Screen
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
3 Select the required event from the [Available
Camera Input/Output Port
and Events (continued)
Input Event(S)] list and click the
add the event
button to
Specify the event name and e-mail settings on the [Add New Event]
screen.
I/O Settings (continued)
A
Ⅵ Specifying an Input Event
1 Select the camera for specifying the event from
the [Defined events] list on the [I/O Setup]
screen
B
C
[Add New Event] Screen
Item
Description
A External
For specifying a name for the particular
input event.
event name
Memo :
●
The following characters cannot be
used as part of the event name.
< > & ^8217 ^8220 \ / : * ? | [ ]
[I/O Setup] Screen
2 Click the [Add new event...] button
B Send e-mail
if this event
occurs
Select this check box to send an e-mail
alert when the input event occurs.
●
The [Multiple Input Events] screen appears.
C Include
image from
camera
Select this check box to attach the
A
B
currently recorded images to the e-mail
when the input event is triggered. Select a
camera from the list next to the check box.
F
E
D
C
Note :
●
●
●
The [Add new event...] button is disabled if there is no event
available for the network camera.
The [Add New Event] screen may vary according to the type of
event to be added.
If the [SKIP] and [
[Multiple Input Events] Screen
D/E/C/B] buttons are disabled while you are
modifying the settings, use the software keyboard (
or the mouse.
Item
A Input
events for
Description
Displays the device name for which the input
event is specified. (This is a read-only field.)
device
B Available
Input
Lists the available input events.
Event(S)
C
D
You can enable an event by selecting it in the
[Available Input Event(S)] list
clicking the [ ] button.
B, followed by
For selecting an event in the [Enabled Input
Event(S)] list , and moving it to the [Available
C
Input Event(S)] list
event.
B. Doing so disables the
E Edit
For editing the event setting selected in the
[Enabled Input Event(S)] list.
F Enabled
Input
Lists the input events that can be used.
Event(S)
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input/Output Terminal on Rear Panel
Specifying Timer Events
You can add a timer event to an added event.
A timer event is defined with respect to an input event and is
triggered by that event. Timer events are triggered when the
specified time interval has lapsed after occurrence of the input
event at the preset destination.
●
The audio input acts as a network device in the VR-N1600U/E
system, and the device name assigned to it is NVR . The input/
output terminals on the rear panel have been assigned to the
NVR device by default. (VR-N1600U/E)
A
B
A
B
●
In VR-N900U, analog input circuitry is considered as a network
encoder (IP video server), and the device name assigned to it is
1 Select the event for adding a timer event from
the [Defined events] list on the [I/O Setup]
screen
AN900
B. The input/output terminals on the rear panel have been
assigned to the
A
N900 device by default. (VR-N900U)
B
Ⅵ Rear Panel Input Terminals
(An example of adding a timer event to the input
event)
Rear Panel Input
Terminal Name
Name of Input Event
Event Description
Alarm IN 1 to 8 Falling
(VR-N1600U/E)
Alarm IN 1 to 4 Falling
(VR-N900U)
Event during
detection of Make
signal input
ALARM IN 1 to 8
(VR-N1600U/E)
ALARM IN 1 to 4
(VR-N900U)
Alarm IN 1 to 8 Rising
(VR-N1600U/E)
Alarm IN 1 to 4 Rising
(VR-N900U)
Even during
detection of Break
signal input
Ⅵ Output Terminals
Rear Panel Output
Terminal Name
Name of Output Event
Output Action
[I/O Setup] Screen
Set output Option Out 1,2 Outputs the Make
high
Set output Option Out 1,2 Outputs the
low Break status
status
OPTION OUT1,2
2 Click the [Add new event...] button
●
The [New Timer] screen appears.
Note :
●
Although the duration of output for the rear panel output
terminals is indicated as0 seconds, it is infinitely output.
Output events of the rear output terminals cannot be deleted.
All terminal inputs are treated as alerts, but there can only be
association (sequence) between one terminal with recording
start.
A
●
●
B
C
Specifying a VMD Event
1 Select the camera for specifying the VMD event
from the [Defined events] list on the [I/O Setup]
screen
[New Timer] Screen
2 Click the [Add VMD Event(Motion Detection)]
3 Specify the timer interval and timer event name.
button
If a multi-camera device is selected, such as a network encoder (IP
video server), a dialog for you to select the required camera will
appear.
Item
Description
A Timer
Displays the event or event button name for
which a timer event is added. (This is a read-
only field.)
event is
started
by:
Note :
●
The [Add VMD Event(Motion Detection)] button is disabled if
there is no VMD event available for the network camera.
B Timer
event
For specifying a name for the timer event.
name
C Timer
event
For specifying the time interval from the
occurrence of the event or clicking of the event
button until the timer event is triggered. Specify
the time interval in seconds or minutes.
occurs
after:
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Note :
Camera Input/Output Port
and Events (continued)
●
The [Add new output event...] button is disabled if there is no
output available for use by the network camera.
[Advanced] Screen
The [Advanced] screen enables you to specify network settings for
handling events.
Specifying an Output
1 Click the [Advanced...] button on the [I/O Setup]
1 Select the camera for specifying the event from
the [Defined events] list on the [I/O Setup]
screen
screen
●
The [Advanced] screen appears.
2 Click the [Add new output event...] button
1
2
Click
[I/O Setup] Screen
●
The [Add New Output] screen appears.
A
B
A
B
C
D
C
D
E
[Advanced] Screen
[Add new output] Screen
3 Specify the output connection destination,
output holding time, and output name
2 Specify the following items.
Item
Description
Item
Description
A External
Displays the device name for which
output is specified. (This is a read-only
field.)
A FtpServer For specifying the port number to use for
sending event information from the device to
the surveillance system via FTP. (Specify a
number between 1 to 65535.)
output
Port
connected to
B Output
connected on
For selecting which destination to
connect the output to.
B Alert Port For specifying the port number to use for
handling warnings related to events, including
generic events. (Specify a number between 1
to 65535.)
C Keep output
For specifying the output holding time in
units of 1/10 seconds or seconds.
for
D External
For specifying a name for the output.
C SMTP
For specifying the port number to use for
sending event information from the device to
the surveillance system via SMTP. (Specify a
number between 1 to 65535.)
output name
Port
Memo :
●
The following characters cannot be
used as part of the event name.
< > & ^8217 ^8220 \ / : * ? | [ ]
E Test Output
Click this to perform a test on the output
settings.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select [Global] (apply to all cameras) or a
Item
Description
specific camera
D Polling
For some devices, the surveillance system
may need to check the status of their input
ports in order to detect whether input has been
received. These regular status checks are
3 Click [Add new event...] to add the event button
Frequenc
y[1/10sec]
called ApollingB.
The [Polling Frequency[1/10sec]] field enables
you to specify the interval between status
checks. Specify the interval in units of 1/10
seconds.
2
3
Memo :
●
For I/O devices, it is highly recommended
that the polling frequency be shortened as
much as possible.
●
Refer to the “Instruction Manual” of the I/O
device for devices that require polling.
Note :
A
B
●
Do not alter these settings unless under special circumstances.
Altering the setting unnecessarily may cause the system to
malfunction. They need not be altered under normal
circumstances.
C
Precautions during alteration
●
When using event audio, the [Transfer port] of [Event Audio
Setting] [Communication setting] must coincide with the [Alert
It is also necessary to set the [Alert Port] to a different number
from the [Event receive port] of [Event Audio Setting]
-
●
-
[Add New Event] Screen
Item
Description
Configuring Event Buttons
Event buttons are used to manually trigger events from the [Live
Viewing] screen.
A Button related
Displays the camera name for which the
event is specified. (This is a read-only
field.)
to
1 Click the [Event Buttons...] button on the
B Manual event
For specifying a name for the event
button.
[Camera Recording Administator] screen
name
Memo :
●
The following characters cannot be
used as part of the event name.
< > & ^8217 ^8220 \ / : * ? | [ ]
C E-Mail settings
Send e-mail if this
event occurs
Select this check box to send an e-mail
alert when the event button is clicked.
Include image from Select this check box to attach the
[Event Buttons...]
camera
currently recorded images to the e-mail
when the event button is clicked. Select
a camera from the list below the check
box.
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
Memo :
●
To specify a timer event for an event, select the event added in
Step 3, and click [Add new event...].
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
2 Select Generic and click [Add new event...]
Camera Input/Output Port
and Events (continued)
A
B
C
Specifying Generic Events
What is a generic event?
This is a function that uses TCP or UDP protocol communication as
an input event for this unit.
When character strings in the communication data received by the
unit matches the predetermined conditions, the corresponding
generic event is triggered. To define a generic event, you need to
configure the incoming data settings at this unit as well as the
outgoing data settings at the camera (or network device to be
used).
The procedures for configuring the incoming data settings at this
unit are described below.
[Add New Event] Screen
1 Click the [Generic Events...] button on the
A General Event settings
[Camera Recording Administator] screen
Item
Description
Event Name
For specifying a name for the event. Enter a
unique name for the event.
Memo :
●
The following characters cannot be used
as part of the event name.
< > & ^8217 ^8220 \ / : * ? | [ ]
Event Protocol
Any
For selecting the protocol that this unit uses
to receive data when detecting the event:
[Generic
Events...] Button
Receives and analyzes data that uses either
the TCP or UDP protocol.
TCP
Receives and analyzes only data that uses
the TCP protocol.
[Camera Recording Administator] Screen
UDP
Receives and analyzes only data that uses
the UDP protocol.
Event rule type
Match
For specifying the rules when analyzing the
received data.
In order for an event to be triggered, the
received data must totally coincide with the
message specified in the [Event message
include] field of the [Event rules string]
section
messages.
C, and must not contain any other
A
B
C
Search
In order for an event to be triggered, the
received data must contain the message
specified in the [Event message include] field
[Generic Events] Screen
of the [Event rules string] section
C. Other
messages may be included in the data.
Event priority
The same data may be used by different
events. Assigns the order of priority to each
event for determining the event to trigger
when the received data matches the criteria
of multiple events. Set the priority level to a
Item
Description
For adding new events.
Add new event...
Edit selected...
value between
A0
B
(lowest priority) and
For editing the event selected in the [Defined
events] list.
A
1000 (highest priority).
B
Memo :
Remove selected For deleting the event selected in the
[Defined events] list.
●
This unit receives generic events from the port that is specified
in [Alert Port] on the [Advanced] screen. (
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B Notification settings
Item
Description
Send e-mail if this Select this check box to send an e-mail alert
event occurs
when an event occurs.
Include image
from camera
Select this check box to attach the currently
recorded images to the e-mail when the input
event is triggered. Select a camera from the
list below the check box.
C Event rules string
Item
Description
Event substring
For specifying the expression to search for
during data analysis by this unit.
Specify at least one expression, and click the
[Add] button. The specified expression is
added to the [Event message include] field.
If you have added multiple expressions as
one item, the expressions enclosed in the
quotation marks must appear together in the
data in the specified sequence in order to
match the criteria.
Event message
include
Displays the string that is used for the actual
data analysis. The field is not directly
editable. However, you can place the cursor
inside the field and click the following
buttons.
Add
(
Adds the information in the [Event substring]
to the [Event message include] field.
Adds [(] to the [Event message include] field.
The parenthesis is used to process the
expressions as a single entity. In other words,
the content inside the parenthesis is
processed first.
)
Adds [)] to the [Event message include] field.
AND
Adds the operator
message include] field. Use the
operator when you want to specify that the
A
AND
B
to the [Event
AAND
B
expressions on both sides of
present.
AANDB must be
OR
Adds the operator AORB to the [Event
message include] field. Use the OR operator
when you want to specify that either one of
the expressions on the two sides of OR must
be present.
Delete
For deleting the item to the left of the cursor
in the [Event message include] field.
Memo :
●
To specify the timer settings for a generic event, select the event
added in Step 2, and click the [Add new event...] button.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
5 Repeat 2 to 4 for each event
Camera Input/Output Port
and Events (continued)
●
To delete an event for which notification has been
configured, select the event and click the [ ] button.
Specifying an Output Port
A specific event or manual button can be associated with a
particular output port.
Event Notification Settings
To do this, specify the output port from which output is to be
triggered when a specific event or manual event occurs.
When a specific event occurs, this can be indicated using yellow
color in the title bar area at the top of the live image display screen.
The yellow indicator lights up when the specified event has
occurred, the red indicator lights up when motion has been
detected, and the green indicator lights up when images are
received from a camera.
1 Select [I/O Control] from the [Camera Record
Setting] screen
●
A setting dialog box appears.
1 Select the camera to configure from the [Camera
Recording Administator] screen, and select
[Settings...]
●
A setting dialog box appears.
2 Click the [Event Notifications...] button
[I/O Control] Screen
2 Select the event to specify from the list on the
left
3 Select the output to specify, and click the [
]
button located below [Selected Outputs]
●
To delete an output from the [Selected Outputs] list, select
the output and click the [ ] button.
[Camera Settings]
2
Screen
3 Select the event to trigger notification from
[Available Events]
4 Click the [
] button
●
The selected event is copied to [Active Events].
3
4
[Setup Notifications on Events] Screen
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Specifying Output via Motion Detection
Camera Output Settings
You can assign external outputs specified on the [I/O Setup] screen
to a camera, such as sounding of a siren or switching on of lights.
You can specify outputs to be triggered automatically when motion
is detected.
1 Select an output from the [All Output] list
●
The assigned outputs can be triggered automatically when
motion is detected, or manually by pressing the output buttons.
You can display the [Output Settings] screen by clicking the
[Outputs...] button on the [Camera Recording Administator]
2 Click the
button between the [All Output]
and [On Motion Detected] lists
●
●
●
Doing so copies the selected output to the [On Motion
Detected] list.
To delete an output from the [On Motion Detected] list,
select the output and click the
button between the [All
Output] and [On Motion Detected] lists.
[Output Settings] Screen
Ⅵ Specifying Output During Manual Control
[Output Settings] Screen
You can specify outputs to be triggered manually using the output
button or from a list on the [Live] screen.
1 Select an output from the [All Output] list
2 Click the
button between the [All Output]
and [On Manusl Control] lists
●
●
Doing so copies the selected output to the [On Manusl
Control] list.
You can use the Up/Down buttons at the top right corner
of the [On Manusl Control] list to move the selected output
upward/downward within the [On Manusl Control] list.
To delete an output from the [On Manusl Control] list,
●
select the output and click the
button between the [All
Output] and [On Manusl Control] lists.
[Output Settings] Screen
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Ⅵ Setting Buttons and Check Boxes
Motion Settings
Item
Description
A Set All
Sets all sections in the grid on the preview
image as exclusion areas.
B Clear All
C Auto
Clears all sections in the grid on the preview
image that are specified as exclusion areas.
Note :
Click this button to automatically detect areas
with insignificant image changes (noises)
●
Before configuring the motion detection settings, it is
recommended that you complete the settings related to image
resolution, compression, and motion detection exclusion areas.
Otherwise, you may need to adjust the sensitivity level in the
motion detection settings again when you change the picture
quality and set the exclusion areas at a later date.
that are not to be detected as AmotionB, and
mark such areas to exclude them from
motion detection. As a large number of
images need to be analyzed during the
marking operation, it may take a while to
complete after you have clicked the [Auto]
button.
D Show Grid
Select this check box to enable the display of
grids on the preview image. The default
setting is [Show Grid].
Defining Motion Detection Exclusion
Regions
You can specify specific areas to be excluded from motion detection
to prevent the detection of irrelevant motion, such as trees swaying
in the wind or cars that drive past continuously in the background.
Note :
●
●
●
Note that when motion detection is set at short intervals, the
number of alarms may increase and a longer search time may
be required during playback.
When a camera is connected, flickers such as those of a
fluorescent light may cause a false motion detection. In this
case, set the camera to flickerless.
Noises in the camera image may also trigger a false detection.
Set the camera to prevent false detection even when the ACG
function is enabled, such as during nighttime.
1 Select a camera from the [Device Manager] on
the [Camera Recording Administator] screen,
and click [Exclude Regions...] in [Settings...]
●
If the [Show Grid] check box is selected, the preview
screen appears, which is divided into small areas by a
grid. Areas highlighted in blue indicate the exclusion
areas.
A
B
C
D
[Exclude Regions...] Screen
2 To select an area, click and drag the mouse
pointer to move the grid on the screen
●
Selected areas are highlighted in blue.
Memo :
●
To clear the exclusion areas, right click and drag the mouse
pointer to move the grid.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying Motion Detection
Motion detection enables you to specify the timing to transfer
images from the camera, generate alerts, and trigger external
outputs (lights or sirens).
Note :
●
This feature is essential to the system’s operation. In order to
avoid unnecessary alerts during application, it is recommended
that you specify the settings for each camera carefully.
Depending on the physical location where the camera is
installed, it may be necessary to perform tests and adjustments
of the settings under different conditions (time of the day,
weather such as windiness, etc.).
1 Select a camera from [Device Manager] on the
[Camera Recording Administator] screen, and
click the [Motion Detection..] button in
[Settings...] to open [Adjust Motion Detection]
2 Specify [Noise Sensitivity] and [Motion
Sensitivity]
●
The [Noise Sensitivity] slider is used to determine the level
of change in the image pixel that is to be recognized as
motion. The AHighB setting recognizes minute changes in
the pixel as motion. Areas in the image that have changed
when compared with the previous image are highlighted
(default color is green).
[Adjust Motion Detection] Screen
Memo :
●
The [Motion Sensitivity] slider is used to determine the number
of pixels for which a change is to be recognized as motion. When
the slider is moved from side to side, the black vertical line at the
bottom of the screen moves together, and the boundary (Motion
Sensitivity) is adjusted. When detected motion exceeds the
selected sensitivity level, the bar changes from green to red,
indicating a positive detection.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Item
Description
General Settings
E Advanced
Don't send e- Select this check box to stop sending e-mail
mail on
camera
failures
alerts if a camera is no longer in the online
mode.
Use [Camera Record Setting]-[General Settings] to specify general
settings related to the system, such as e-mails.
Start cameras You are able to view live images from
on remote live cameras even when they are in the offline
requests
mode.
The camera switches automatically to the
online mode when the live screen of NVR
Viewer is displayed. During the interval when
the scheduler is set to offline, recording will
not be performed even if this feature is in the
online mode.
G
F
Note :
A
B
●
:When
A
Start cameras on remote live
E
requests
B
is selected, the camera
switches to the online mode while you are
viewing live images. Depending on the
settings when in the recording control
mode, recording may start when you start
viewing live images. This also applies to
viewing live images on a surveillance
computer.
C
D
[General Settings] Screen
Note :
●
Do not use the [Enable Protection]/[Chenge Password...]
function in the [Administrator Settings].
Create default Select this check box to automatically create
schedule for the online schedule of the camera in the
Item
Description
F Event
Recording
Do not change.
A Milestone Settings for using Milestone XProtect Central
by Milestone Systems.
XProtect
Central
Settings
Settings
Memo :
G Logfile
Do not change.
●
For details, refer to the Milestone
XProtect Smart Client User’s Manual
available on the website of Milestone
Systems (http://www.milestonesys.com).
The URL address may be subject to
changes.
Settings
●
B Patrolling Specify the settings in this section when you
are using PTZ cameras for the patrolling
Settings
C Joystick
For specifying settings related to the joystick.
Memo :
●
There may be cases where settings
cannot be specified on this screen. For
details on other methods of setting, refer
D E-Mail
For specifying the e-mail settings.
settings
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
E-mail Settings
A Enable E-
Select this check box to enable sending of
e-mail alerts.
mail(Monitor)
B Recipient(S)
For specifying the e-mail addresses to
send alerts to. If you are specifying more
than one e-mail address, separate the e-
mail addresses using semicolons.
A
B
C Sender
For specifying the sender’s e-mail address,
outgoing (SMTP) mail server name and
login settings.
Settings
D Subject text
For specifying the mail title.
C
E Message text For specifying the message text.
F Time
btw.mail(min
For specifying the time interval (minutes)
for sending each e-mail alert.
utes)
G Include
Select this check box to include images in
the message.
D
E
F
Image
Memo :
●
You can send a test e-mail by clicking the [Test] button. If the e-
mail address of the sender is not registered with the mail server
of the recipient, the [The mail address of the sender is not valid.
...] message may appear. When this occurs, double-check the
sender’s e-mail address and outgoing mail server, and re-enter
the e-mail address.
●
E-mail messages are sent in the following cases.
G
●
●
●
●
When an input event occurs
[E-mal setup] Screen
When the event button is clicked
When a generic event occurs
When motion is detected
When camera failure occurs
When an archiving error occurs
●
●
●
●
In order to send an e-mail via Motion Detection, you need to
specify the timing for sending out e-mails in [Scheduler Setting]
After you have completed the e-mail setting, perform a test to
verify that it can be sent successfully.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Ⅵ Setting Items and Buttons
Archiving
Item
Description
A Enable
Archiving
This function is not available.
The check box is selected at all times.
B Delet databases For specifying the number of days you
want to store archived images.
in the backup
directory older
then [ ] days
With the archiving feature, you can store recorded images up to the
maximum available capacity of the hard disk.
By default, recorded images received from cameras are stored in
the database for each camera, and data is automatically archived
when the database is full.
C Automatic
delete old
This function is not available. The check
box is selected at all times.
archives if
space is needed
Memo :
●
To adjust the database settings for each camera, click [Camera
Record Setting]-[Device Manager]-[Camera Name]- and
D Send email on
Sends out an e-mail alert when
archiving fails.
select [Datebase Settings]. You can store up to 600,000 frames
or 40 GB of data. If the maximum capacity is exceeded, data is
deleted starting from the oldest information. By archiving on a
daily basis, you can store image data up to the maximum
available capacity of the hard disk.
archive error
E Automatic path The archiving location is automatically
selected. The drive with a large amount
of free space is selected.
selection
●
●
You can specify the number of times to create archives in a day.
The archiving location for each camera is automatically selected.
The drive with a large amount of free space is selected.
You can use the playback features for archived images in the
same way as normal recorded images.
Select this check box.
If the check box is deselected, the
[Save to] button appears.
Deselect this check box if you are
specifying a drive to save the archive
data to, such as NAS.
●
Save to
This button appears when the
1
Click [Camera Recording Administator]
Setup]
-
[Archive
[Automatic path selection] check box is
deselected. Specify the archive location
for each camera. Enter the archive
location if you are specifying a drive to
save the archive data to, such as NAS.
K
J
A
B
Note :
●
If you change the archive path after
applying the setting, playback of
previously archived data will fail.
C
D
E
F Select cameras If you have selected the [Enable
Archiving] check box, a list of cameras
that enable archiving appears.
To specify the archiving settings for a
specific camera, select the check box
next to the name of the camera.
for which the
archiving
function should
apply
F
G Set All
Selects the check box for all cameras.
Clears the check box for all cameras.
Not used.
G
H
I
H Clear All
[Archive Setup] Screen
I Set all paths
2
Specify the number of days for storing the archived
data in [Delet databases in the backup directory older
then [ ] days]
3
4
Use the [Add] and [Delete] buttons to specify the time
to create archives everyday
Select the camera for which archive is to be created
Note :
●
The recorded images may be interrupted for several seconds
when archiving starts.
Memo :
●
If audio is enabled during recording, audio data from the device
will also be archived.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Setting Items and Buttons
Precautions when Changing NAS Archive
Settings
Item
Description
When NAS is specified as the archive destination, the path that is
displayed on the “Select Directory” screen may not coincide with the
preset value.
J Time to add For specifying the archiving time.
Add
Adds the archiving time specified in the
[Time to add] field to the [[Daily archiving
times]
K
list.
Delete
Removes a selected archiving time from the
list.
K Daily
Lists specified archiving times. Archiving
takes place everyday at the specified time.
archiving
times
Memo :
●
NAS is a dedicated file server that is connected to the network.
In the case of this unit, you can specify NAS as a drive for
archiving data.
[Archive Setup] Screen
[Select Directory] Screen
(h:/is specified as the archive
●
For details on the NAS drive settings, refer to the [Details] item
(C drive is displayed)
destination)
under [HDD Utility]. (
Note :
●
When other operations (e.g., startup of Live Viewing) overlap
with the startup of the archiving process, up to 3 seconds of the
recording may be lost.
●
●
Set the interval of performing achieving to more than 1 hour.
Do not specify the same NAS drive for multiple cameras. If there
is an insufficient number of NAS drives to be specified for each
camera, divide the NAS drive into multiple partitions, and
configure each of them as a separate NAS drive.
Precautions when Changing Archive
Settings
Do not specify the C, L, or M drive as the archive destination. Doing
so may cause the system to malfunction.
●
Changing the [Automatic path selection] settings may cause
playback of data prior to the change to fail.
Save to Button
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Item
Description
Database Settings
D In case of
database
failure the
following
action
For selecting the action to take when
problems are found in the database. The
number of options available varies depending
on whether archiving is enabled.
Select AArchive(no repair)B. If you have
selected another option, the data may be lost
if problems occur in the database.
syould be
taken
This section enables you to specify the database settings.
Select a camera from [Main Menu]
-
[Camera Record Setting]
-
[Device Manager], and select
-[Settings...].
[Repair,Scan,Delete if fails]:
Memo :
●
Recorded image data is referred to as the database in this
Two different repair methods, quick repair (recovery) and
complete repair (scan), are used. Content of the database will
be deleted if both repair methods fail.
manual.
The recorded images are saved as database.
[Repair,Delete if fails]:
The fast repair method is used. Content of the database will be
deleted if fast repair fails.
[Archive if fails]:
This option is available only if archiving is enabled for the
camera. The fast repair method is used. Content of the
database will be archived if fast repair fails.
[Delete(no repair)]:
Do not select this item.
[Archive(no repair)]:
[Camera Settings] Screen
A
D
This option is available only if archiving is enabled for the
camera. Content of the database is archived. Select this
option.
B
E
E Datebase
Do not change the settings.
C
path
Memo :
●
●
The database can store up to 600,000 records.
Ⅵ Specify the Database Settings
The maximum database size is set to 108,000 records by
default. Do not change this setting as it may adversely affect the
recording time and recording performance.
When archiving is used, you can store images without being
constrained by this limit.
Item
Description
●
●
A Max.records Saves recorded images to the database
until the maximum number of records is
reached. Specify the maximum number of
records in the neighboring field.
in database
The following screen may appear for some settings. When it
appears, click [No].
If the [Archive automatically when database
is full]
C
check box is not selected, old
records are automatically overwritten upon
exceeding the maximum number of records.
Note :
B Max
Saves recorded images to the database up
to the specified recording time. Specify the
total recording time from the list in the
neighboring field in minutes, hours and
days.
●
If you are not using a UPS, it is recommended that you select
Max timespan in database and set the time to 60minutesB.
timespan in
database
A
B
A
If the [Archive automatically when database
is full]
C
check box is not selected, old
records are automatically overwritten upon
exceeding the recording time.
C
Archive
automatically
when
database is
full
Starts archiving data automatically when
the database is full.
Deletes old archive data when the available
space of the hard disk is running low.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ Save Setting Date
Flash Memory Utility
The following are procedures to save the preset data in the flash
memory device.
1 Insert the flash memory device into the
[SERIAL] terminal on the front (rear) panel
2 Select [Save Setting Date]
You can save set values to flash memory devices or retrieve data
from them.
●
●
A [Save Setting Data?] confirmation message appears.
The [Flash memory cannot be detected] message may
appear in some cases. In this case, wait for about 30
seconds and select [Save Setting Date] again.
1 Select [Flash Memory Utility] from the main
menu
●
The [Flash Memory Utility] screen appears.
3 Press the [OK] button
●
●
The preset data is saved.
When saving is complete, a message informing you that
data has been saved appears. Click the [OK] button again.
4 Select [Remove Flash Memory]
●
The [Remove Flash Memory?] confirmation message
appears. Press [OK].
●
The [Flash Memory was removed] message appears.
Press [OK].
5 Remove the flash memory device from the
[SERIAL] on the front (rear) panel
Memo :
[Flash Memory Utility] Screen
● Items specified in the [Image Quality...] settings of [Main
●
●
●
Settings data is saved to the VR-N1600U/E folder in the flash
memory (USB memory). (VR-N1600U/E)
Settings data is saved to the VR-N900U folder in the flash
memory (USB memory). (VR-N900U)
To save the preset data after you have selected [Remove Flash
Memory], remove the flash memory device from the serial
terminal and insert it again. The flash memory inserted will be
automatically detected.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Ⅵ Removing the Flash Memory Device
1 Select [Remove Flash Memory]
Flash Memory Utility
(continued)
●
The [Remove Flash Memory?] confirmation dialog
appears. Press [OK].
Ⅵ Reading Preset Data
This section describes procedures for reading the preset data from
the flash memory.
1 Insert the flash memory device into the
[SERIAL] terminal on the front (rear) panel
●
The [Flash Memory was removed] message appears.
Press [OK].
2 Select [Load Setting Data]
●
If data is stored on the flash memory device, a list of data
stored in the device will appear in the preset data list.
The [Flash memory cannot be detected] message may
appear in some cases. In this case, wait for about 30
seconds and select [Load Setting Data] again.
●
●
●
Preset data that is stored on this unit is indicated by
Machine at the beginning. Data stored on other NVR
units is displayed as Other Machine . This is followed by
a pair of parentheses, which contains the MAC address of
the NVR where data was saved. This is followed by the
saved date/time in the Ayyyy-mm-dd-sec-SettingB format.
If multiple data are displayed, highlight the data in the list
that you want to read.
AMy
B
A
B
2 Remove the flash memory device from the
[SERIAL] on the front (rear) panel
Memo :
●
Items specified in the [Image Quality...] settings of [Main
Menu]
Page 58), [OS Setting]
Page 73), and [Password] section of [Unit Setting 1]
Page 69) will not be saved.
●
To read the preset data after you have selected [Remove
Flash Memory], remove the flash memory device from the
serial terminal and insert it again. When the flash memory is
inserted, it will be automatically detected.
Note :
●
●
●
If you are reading preset data saved using a different language
setting, change [Language Setting] of the [Main Menu] to the
language used when the data is saved.
If a Master/Slave setup is created using Milestone System’s
Enterprise 6.0 on an NVR, settings on that unit cannot be loaded
on another NVR.
Data saved using VR-N900U cannot be used on VR-N1600U/E.
and vice versa.
[Setting Data List] Screen
3 Select the setting to load, followed by pressing
[Load]
●
The highlighted data will be read.
4 The [Load Setting Data?] confirmation message
appears. Press [OK].
●
●
The preset data will be read.
When reading is complete, a message informing you that
data has been read appears. Click the [OK] button.
5 Press [Close] to return to the [Flash Memory
Utility] screen
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Specify the following items under [IP Lease
Auto Detect Settings
Parameter]
Item
Description
Start Address
For specifying the first IP address to be
assigned to the cameras.
Unit
For selecting the number of IP addresses
to be assigned to the cameras. The
selected number of IP addresses will be
assigned starting from the first IP address.
This section enables you to assign an IP address to each camera
and configure various auto detect settings.
Specifying IP Lease
For configuring the function to assign IP addresses to each network
Subnet Mask
For specifying the subnet mask for the
cameras.
camera.
Default Gateway
DNS Server
For specifying the gateway for the
cameras.
Note :
●
In order to assign an IP address of the network camera using the
IP Lease feature, you need to enable the DHCP of the network
camera. For procedures to enable the DHCP of the network
camera, refer to the instruction manual of the network camera.
For specifying the DNS server address for
the camera(s).
Domain Name
Lease Time Limit
For specifying the domain name for the
cameras.
For specifying the valid period of the IP
address assigned to the cameras. If YesB
is selected, you can set the lease time in
units of hours.
1 Select [Auto Detect Setting] from [Main Menu]
A
●
The [Auto Detect Settings] screen appears.
Client
For selecting whether to apply restrictions
on the device when assigning the IP
2
3
address. If
address will only be assigned to the
corresponding camera. If Any Client is
selected, IP address will be assigned to all
devices.
AOnly CameraB is selected, IP
A
B
Reserve MAC
Address
Configure the [Reserve MAC Address] if
you want to assign a specific IP address to
the cameras. A specific IP address is
always mapped to a MAC address. Enter a
value in the MAC and IP fields, and click
[Add] to set the addresses. To cancel the
setting, select a displayed MAC and IP
address, and click [Del].
4
[Auto Detect Settings] Screen
2 Select [Enable] in [IP Lease]
Memo :
4 Click [OK]
●
●
Doing so hides the setting screen and starts IP Lease.
●
If a network uses a multiple number of NVR units, enable the [IP
Lease] only for one unit. Select [Disable] if a DHCP server is
operating on the same network.
Select
ADisable
B
in Step
2
to stop IP Lease.
●
When the [IP Lease] is enabled for two or more devices at the
same time, the IP address may change to a static address, and
cause malfunction of the cameras.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
3 Configure the analog input (VR-N900U)
Auto Detect Settings
(continued)
●
For specifying the number of channels and format of the
analog input to be used.
Note :
●
If the signals of the analog camera connected to the rear panel
[VIDEO IN1 to 4] terminal are different from those in the
[AnalogInput] settings (NTSC/PAL), a message indicating
A
ENCODE ERROR(format)
[OK] button using the mouse to hide the
ERROR(format) message, followed by specifying the NTSC/
B
will appear. In this case, click the
Using the Auto Detect Feature
The Auto Detect feature enables automatic detection of network
cameras.
AENCODE
B
PAL selection for [AnalogInput] correctly.
●
For details on how to use the mouse, refer to [Character Input
Memo :
●
When multicast packets are configured such that they do not
pass through the network equipment, such as a switching hub,
the Auto Detect of the camera may not function properly.
4 Click [Entry]
5 Click [OK]
The [IP Information] list contains information on the IP address of
the automatically detected camera, MAC address, number of video
CH, manufacturer, and model.
●
The [Camera Record Setting] screen appears.
6 Click the [Close] button on the [Camera Record
1
Setting] screen
VR-N900U
●
The Default View is automatically created. To save this
view, change its name.
2
Memo :
●
The Default View created by the Auto Detect feature may
change the camera placement in the view. To maintain a fixed
position, name the view and save it.
3
4
Note :
●
Select ADo not detect in the future.B check box on the [Detect
Device] screen during the Auto Detect operation if you do not
want the [Detect Device] screen of that camera to appear during
subsequent Auto Detect operations. For cameras that you have
5
excluded from detection, you can add (
Page 86) them again
manually at a later time.
1 Click [Auto Detect]
●
Auto Detect starts and the camera image appears on the
screen.
2 Replace the detected camera accordingly in
sequence
●
You can click the Sort button to sort the order of detected
cameras.
●
There are five types of sort buttons, including Sort by [IP],
Sort by [MAC], Sort by [CH], Sort by [MAKER], and Sort
by [MODEL] buttons.
●
●
Select the detected cameras, followed by clicking the [Up]
or [Down] button to change the order of the cameras.
Deselect the check box of any camera that you are not
using.
Memo :
●
The camera at the top of the list is used with priority.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Setting
This option enables you to specify the language you want to use.
Memo :
●
The functions and GUI (graphical user interface) are the same
displayed when this unit is first switched on.
1 Exit NVR Viewer
2 Select [Language Setting] from the main menu
●
The [Language Setting] screen appears when the NVR
Viewer is switched on for the first time.
3 Select a language
●
Click on the [Language Selection] pull-down tab and
select the language you want to use.
4 Click the [OK] button
●
Click the [OK] button to enable your selection. The system
will reboot when the language setting is changed.
3
4
[Language Selection] Screen
Note :
●
Specify the language settings immediately after this unit has
started up.
●
When language setting is complete, the device automatically
reboots. It may take about five minutes to exit the settings.
Set the language after shutting down the NVR Viewer.
Never turn off the power while setting the language.
●
●
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Item
Description
HDD Utility
B Defrag
Executes the defragmentation function to
eliminate fragmented files in the volume
selected in the [Volume] field. The
defragmentation process may take several
hours depending on the status of the hard
disk.
If defragmentation cannot be executed for
some reasons, a message indicating that
Defrag cannot be performed now.B
This feature enables you to check the status of the hard disk, and
format (initialize), or defragment (eliminate fragmented space) it.
The [Progress indicator] shows the progress of formatting and
defragmentation.
A
appears. Press [Close] to close the dialog.
A
C Initialize
Executes initialization of the hard disk with
respect of the volume selected in the
[Volume] field. All data contained in the
volume will be lost after initializing. You will
be asked to confirm whether you want to
format the hard disk. If an unformatted disk is
B
C
D
selected, the
A
unformat disk
B
or Aunpartition
disk message will appear.
B
Click [OK] to start initialization. To cancel,
click the [Cancel] button. If initialization
cannot be executed for some reasons, a
message indicating that
AInitialization cannot
be performed now. appears. Press [OK] or
B
[Cancel] to close the dialog.
Normally, the hard disk is formatted prior to
shipping, but some types of hard disk may
remain unformatted. In this case, you will see
the [unformat disk] message in the [Volume]
field. For unformatted disks, select [unformat
disk] and press [Initialize].
[Progress
F
[HDD Utility] Screen
Note :
●
Volumes C, D and L cannot be initialized.
D Error
This is usually not selected. Use it only if you
suspect there is abnormality in the hard disk,
or if you want to check the data structure of
the disk. Recovery of large-capacity hard
disks may take several hours. Recovery of
the hard disk in the system is impossible.
Recovery will be executed the next time the
system is started.
Check
E
Recovery may not be possible when the
volume to recover is currently in use. In this
case, a message indicating AError check
cannot be performed now. Do you want to
schedule a recovery during the next system
1 Select [HDD Utility] from the main menu
●
The [HDD Utility] screen appears. Specify the following
items.
startup? will be displayed. Select whether
B
you want to click the [Cancel] button and
retry by clicking the [Recover] button again,
or whether you want to click the [OK] button
to execute recovery the next time the system
is started.
Item
Description
A Volume
Click the Down arrow to the right of the
[Volume] field to select a hard disk. When
you have selected a hard disk, the capacity
and percentage of free space will appear in
the fields below.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Restoring Default Settings
E Details
Click this option to display the [Advanced]
screen.
You can specify the settings when archiving
to NAS or the built-in HDD on this screen.
NAS User Settings
User name
Follow the procedures below to restore the default settings.
For specifying the user name for connecting
to NAS.
1 Select [Return to default setting] from the main
Password
For specifying the password for connecting
to NAS.
menu
●
The [After initializing,the system is automatically rebooted.
Reboot now?] message appears.
NAS Drive
Add
Enter the IP address of the NAS to be
connected to the [Address], and click the
[Add] button.
2 Click [OK]
●
Reboots the unit after initializing.
Example)
192.168.0.200
NAS Device’s IP Address
Shared Name
Del
Select the NAS to delete in [List], and click
the [Del] button.
Auto Archive
Select
Enable
archiving to
Select this check box.
Data will not be archived to the built-in HDD
internal HDD if this check box is not selected.
F Quick
Selecting the [Quick Format] check box,
followed by clicking the [Initialize] button
enables you to shorten the time required for
the initialization process.
Format
If bad sectors are found during the HDD
initialization process, deselect the [Quick
Format] check box and press the [Initialize]
button.
Note :
●
Settings in the [Password] sections (
Page 69) in [OS
Page 73), [Language Setting], and [Unit Setting 1] of
the [Main Menu] will not be initialized.
Setting](
Memo :
●
NAS is a dedicated file server that is connected to the network.
For this unit, you can specify the NAS as a drive for archiving
data.
●
For details on archiving to the NAS drive, refer to [Archiving]
Note :
●
Specify the user name with a different name from the [OS
connection.
●
After configuring the NAS drive, an error message will appear on
the NVR Viewer for several minutes, and live images may not be
displayed during this interval.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Note :
Distribution Settings
(Details)
●
Do not select this option. For details, consult your system
administrator.
●
If the [Host Name] in [OS Setting] has been changed, enter
AAdministratorB in [Enter the object names to select] on the
[Serect Users or Groups] screen, and click the [Advanced...]
button. Next, click the [OK] button.
●
Windows users need to define a Windows user for each host
name specified in [Host Name] in [OS Setting]. As the user’s
host name is not displayed on the [User Administration] screen,
it is recommended that you delete the Windows user and add
again if you have changed the host name.
User Administration
This section describes procedures to configure user accounts and
rights.
Memo :
Ⅵ User Settings
●
●
●
To edit a preset user name or password, select the user to edit
from the [Current isers/groups] list, and click the [Change
password...] button.
After the [User Administration] screen appears, you are able to
define individual users and their passwords. There are two ways to
add new users.
To delete a preset user, select the user from the [Current isers/
groups] list, and click the [Delete] button. The user that has been
deleted from the list is no longer able to login to NVR Viewer.
After adding a new user in [Add Basic User...], a small square
appears to the top left of the icon on the [User Administration]
screen. You can distinguish between [Add Basic User...] and
[Add Windows User...] using this mark when the same user
name is registered with both.
vr-n1600
Ⅵ Defining User Rights
1 Select [Restrict user access] in the [User
Administration] section
2 Click [User Access...]
● Add Basic User...:
1
2
You can create a dedicated user account for the
surveillance system through authentication of the user
name and password.
● Add Windows User...:
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select the user for which user right is to be
7 Select the functions for each of the cameras that
specified from the [User] list
have been moved to [Viewable by selected user]
●
Select the functions from the list of options below. All
options are selected by default.
Item
Description
3
4
Live
Enables you to view live images from the
selected camera.
PTZ
Enables you to control the PTZ camera using
the NVR Viewer.
PTZ Presets
Outoputs
Enables you to move a PTZ camera to a
preset position using the NVR Viewer.
6
5
Enables you to trigger outputs such as by
switching on lights and sounding sirens, if
such outputs can be generated.
Events
Audio
Enables you to trigger manual events using
the NVR Viewer.
7
Enables you to listen to live audio sound from
the selected camera. (Only when an audio
sound source is specified for the camera)
Browse
Enables you to play back recorded images
from the selected camera.
4 Select the user’s global rights (not restricted by
AVI Export
JPG Export
Enables you to export images in the AVI
format.
cameras) in the [Global User Rights] list
Enables you to export images in the JPEG
format.
Item
View Live
Description
Enables you to view live images.
Database
Export
Enables you to export images and audio
sound in the database format.
Browse
Setup
Enables you to play back recorded images.
Enables you to use the Screen Setup tab.
Sequence
Smart Search
Audio
Enables you to use the Sequences feature to
play back images from a selected camera.
Edit Shared
Views
Enables you to create and edit views within
the shared group.
Enables you to use the Smart Search feature
Page 46) using the NVR Viewer.
Edit Private Views Enables you to create and edit private views.
Enables you to listen to playback audio
sound from the selected camera. (Only when
an audio sound source is specified for the
camera)
5 Select the camera to allow access from the
[Defined Cameras]
6 Click [
] to move to [Viewable by selected
user]
8 Repeat the same procedures for other users
Memo :
●
It is recommended that you limit [Setup] rights to prevent any
inadvertent changes made by system users.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Distribution Settings
(Details) (continued)
Master/Slave Settings
This section enables you to add/delete NVR units as the
slave server.
To use an NVR unit as the master server, you need to select
the [Designate as Master Server] check box and register
slave servers using the steps below.
Ⅵ Adding Slave Servers
2
1 Select [Slaves] in the [Master/Slave Setup]
section
3 Select [Hostname]/[Port] on the [Add New Slave]
screen
3
1
4 Click the [OK] button to register the specified
NVR unit as a slave server
Note :
● Up to four slave servers can be registered for one NVR
unit (master).
● A total of 80 cameras can be managed by one master/
slave system.
● The version of all NVR units in a master/slave system
must be set the same.
● The NVR unit operating as a master server cannot be
used as a slave server for another NVR unit.
● When operating as a master server, the recording display
performance may drop.
2 Select [Add Slave] on the [Slave Administration]
screen
Memo :
● VR-N1600U/E and VR-N900U may be mixed in a master/
slave system.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Click the [Start] button, followed by clicking
Connecting to a Computer
[Control Panel]
The following operations are possible when you connect this unit to
a computer.
●
●
●
Viewing live images on the computer
Controlling network cameras on the computer
Viewing recorded images on the computer
Note :
●
Connect the computer to the LAN2 terminal network.
●
Settings for cameras connected to the LAN1 network cannot be
specified from a computer connected to the LAN2 network.
1
System requirements
2 Click [Network and Internet Connections]-
[Network Connections]
Item
Description
Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows 2000 Server and Advanced
Server, Windows XP Professional (32-
and 64-bit), Windows Vista Business
(32- and 64-bit), Ultimate (32- and 64-
bit) or Windows Server 2003 (32- and
64-bit)
CPU
Intel Pentium4 or higher ( Xeon
recommended for large views), minimum 2.4
GHz
RAM
Minimum 512 MB (1 GB recommended for
large views)
Network
Ethernet, 100 Mbps or higher recommended
Graphics Card
AGP or PCI-Express, minimum 1024 x 768
(1280 x 1024 recommended), 16-bit colors or
higher
Hard Disk Space At least 50 MB free
Software Microsoft. NET Framework 2.0 and DirectX
9.0 or later versions
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
Computer Network Settings
The following is an example for building a small-scale LAN on
Windows XP Professional using the default settings of this unit.
(All screens shown below are Windows XP SP2 configuration
screens.)
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
10 Set [Default gateway] to 192.168.1.254
Connecting to a Computer
(continued)
3 Select the network to which NVR is connected
11 Click the [OK] button
12 Click the [OK] button on the [Local Area
Connections Proparties] screen
4 Right-click and select [Properties]
5 Check to ensure that both the [Cliant for
Microsoft Networks] and [Internet Protocol(TCP/
IP)] check boxes are selected
Note :
●
Do not use the same IP address in the same network
environment.
●
Do not register multiple IP addresses with one NIC when
specifying the computer network settings.
6 Select [Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)] and click the
[Properties] button
7 Select [Use the following IP address]
8 Set [IP address] to 192.168.1.11
9 Set [Subnet Mask] to 255.255.255.0
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Click the [Run] button
Doing so starts up the NVR Viewer Setup Wizard.
Install the NVR Viewer on the Computer
Note :
NVR_Viewer [1].exe
●
Before installing, check to ensure that Microsoft. NET
Framework 2.0, DirectX 9.0 or later versions, and Microsoft
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later versions are already installed on
the computer. If any of these are not installed, installation of the
NVR Viewer may fail.
4 Click [Next] and follow the installation
instructions
1 Open the Internet Explorer browser (6.0 or later
versions), and enter the IP address of NVR as
Ahttp://192.168.1.253B
084ꢈ8KGYGTꢈꢁꢉꢂH
●
A welcome page will appear.
084
NVR Viewer
NVR Viewsr locally
Note :
NVR Viewer 1.0f , you
●
Do not select [Remote Client].
2 Click [Download and install NVR Viewer locally]
●
The [Do you want to run or save this files?] confirmation
message appears.
NVR Viewer.exe
For Windows Vista, select Aall usersB.
NVR Viewer Installer
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Connecting to a Computer
(continued)
Login to the NVR Viewer
1 Double-click the NVR Viewer shortcut on the
desktop
●
When using Windows Vista, right-click the icon and select
Run as administrator to activate NVR Viewer.
(In the properties box that appear when the icon is right-
clicked, select Compatibility Privilege Level and
check Run this program as administrator . This enables
you to activate the program by double-clicking.)
A
B
A
B
-
A
B
A
B
Memo :
●
If the NVR Viewer shortcut is not found on the desktop, select
NVR Viewer from the [Start] menu.
A
B
●
The NVR Viewer Login screen appears.
084ꢈ8KGYGTꢈꢁꢉZZꢉꢈ%NKEMꢈ(KPKUJꢈVQꢈGZKVꢈVJGꢈYK\CTFꢉ
NVR Viewer
NVR
5 Installation complete
●
Installation ends and a shortcut to the
created on the desktop.
ANVR ViewerB is
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Login to NVR Viewer (Continued)
E Remember Saves the password.
2 Specify your login information in the following
If you have selected
authentication or Basic authentication
the [Authentication] item , selecting this
AWindows
password
Auto-login
fields
B
A
B
for
B
check box enables you to login the next time
simply by clicking the [Connect] button.
F
Enables you to login automatically. Select
this check box to enable you to login to [NVR
Viewer] automatically.
A
B
C
D
E
F
3 Click the [Connect] button
●
The NVR Viewer screen appears after a short while.
Memo :
●
If you have previously logged in to the NVR Viewer, a message
● VR-N1600U/E
User name :vr-n1600
Password :vr-n1600
● VR-N900U
User name : vr-n900
Password :vr-n900
will appear asking if you want the view that was used during the
last login to be displayed. (Only when connecting from a
surveillance computer)
[Main View]:
Item
Description
Select this check box to restore the view that you last
used in the main window of the [NVR Viewer].
A Server
For specifying the IP address and port
number of this unit. (For example, in the case
of [http://192.168.1.253:80], [:80] is the port
number.)
The port number is the number as specified
in [Server Configuration] under [Image
address
[Detached Views]:
Select this check box to display the views on the [Primary
Display] screen, multi-monitor, or floating screen.
Note :
Server Setting]. (
Authentication For selecting one of the three types of
authentication.
Select Basic authentication
●
When you log out after reaching the maximum number of
B
distribution clients, you may need to wait for several minutes
before you can establish the connection again.
When multiple computers are connected and audio sound is
played back, the sound may be distorted.
A
B.
●
Windows
authentication
(current user)
Windows authentication. Login as the current
Windows user.
4 Set the display language according to the
country of use
Windows
Windows authentication.
authentication
You can login as a Windows user, but a user
name and password will be required.
A Click the [K] button at the top right corner of the
screen.
Basic
authentication
Basic authentication.
A user name and password will be required
to login to this unit.
B Select [Language] from the menu that appears.
C Select the language used in your country from the
displayed submenu.
C
User name
Password
For entering the Windows user name if you
D Click [OK] when you see a dialog box.
E Click the [
ן ] button at the top right corner to exit the NVR Viewer.
have selected
AWindows authentication
B
for
the [Authentication] item
user name registered in the [User
Administration] item under [Image Server
B
. For entering the
BThe viewer will display in the selected language
during the next startup.
Page 118) if you have selected
ABasic authentication
B.
D
For entering the login password for this unit if
you have selected Windows authentication
for the [Authentication] item . For entering
[
ן ] Button [K] Button
A
B
B
the password registered in the [User
Administration] item under [Image Server
Setting](
Page 118) if you have selected
ABasic authentication
B.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Connecting to a Computer
(continued)
Exiting/Logging Out of the NVR Viewer
[Log Out] Button
[
ן ] Button Uses of the NVR Viewer
For uses of the NVR Viewer, refer to the following pages.
Ⅵ Logging Out
1 Click the [Log Out] button
●
You are logged out and the Login screen of the NVR
Viewer appears again.
Note :
●
If you have restarted this unit, or the NVR Viewer on this unit, log
out from the NVR Viewer at the surveillance computer once, and
login again.
Ⅵ Exiting
1 Click the [
ן ] button ●
Exits the NVR Viewer.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Transmission
Application Control
(VR-N1600U/E)
Audio Transmission
1 Start up the NVR Viewer to check the live
images of the camera
●
With the wallpaper or main menu displayed, press the
[LIVE/BROWSE] button to start up the NVR Viewer.
Audio sound input (such as from a microphone) to the [AUDIO IN 1]
terminal is sent to a camera that supports bidirectional audio, and
output to the speakers connected to the camera.
2 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [7/B] keypad button at the same time
to start up the [Audio Transmission] screen
Preparation
Ⅵ Connection
microphone amplifier or mixer, and connect the
output to [AUDIO IN 1] on the rear panel
3
Memo :
●
Audio sound input to the [AUDIO IN 2] terminal cannot be sent to
cameras that support bidirectional audio.
Ⅵ Registering camera that supports bidirectional
audio
4
5
register the camera that supports bidirectional
audio
[Audio Transmission] Screen
Note :
●
If you have changed the camera password, specify the new
password in [Event Audio Setting] of the main menu. [Password]
3 Select an audio transmission mode
●
There are two audio transmission modes, namely [Multi
Mode] and [Single Mode]. [Multi Mode] enables you to
send out audio sound to multiple cameras at one time.
[Single Mode] sends out audio sound to only one camera.
In the case of [Multi Mode], select the camera for receiving
the audio data on the [Event Audio Setting] screen of the
●
main menu. Select AMulti ModeB from the list at the left
end of the [Event Audio Setting] screen, and select the
checkbox corresponding to the camera for receiving the
audio data. (
●
●
In the case of [Single Mode], you can select the camera
for receiving the audio data in [[Device]Camera Name].
The camera that is receiving the audio sound appears on
the [Status Information] list.
4 Press the [Connect] button to connect to the
camera and start audio transmission
●
Connection status with the camera is displayed in the
[Status] area of the [Status Information] list. Press the
[Connect] button and audio sound that input to [AUDIO IN
1] terminal of this unit will be transmitted to the cameras
that are displayed as
AConnectedB.
●
If Disconnected appears, check the network between
A
B
this unit and the camera, IP address of the camera, and
the power of the camera. If [Authentication failed] appears,
repeat procedures on the [Event Audio Setting] screen to
register the password of the camera for which the
[Authentication failed] message is displayed.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Audio Transmission
Application Control
(VR-N1600U/E) (continued)
5 Press the [Disconnect] button to disconnect the
camera
Memo :
●
Cameras that are not registered in [Camera Record Setting] of
the main menu cannot be selected.
●
If the audio setting of the camera is set to the half duplex mode,
you will not be able to hear audio sound from the camera when
in the AConnectB status.
●
●
If you are sending the microphone sound to a camera for which
an event audio has been set, the audio playback function that is
associated with an event will be disabled during microphone
sound transmission, and priority is given to the microphone
sound transmission.
You can also operate the [Connect] and [Disconnect] button from
the alarm terminal on the rear panel. In this case, select the
alarm terminal to be used for control with [Push To Talk] under
[Event Audio Setting]. An alarm input triggers an action
equivalent to the [Connect] button, and canceling the alarm is
equivalent to the action when you pressed the [Disconnect]
button. Control of the [Connect] and [Disconnect] is valid only
when these buttons are enabled.
Note :
●
If you are configuring the settings or performing an audio
playback test in the [Camera Record Setting] or [Event Audio
Setting] of the main menu, do so after you have closed this
dialog box.
●
If the performance meter lights up in yellow or red, the
microphone sound may be interrupted. To make sure that audio
sound is successfully transmitted, perform operations such as
temporarily stopping the recording operation so that the
performance meter does not light up in yellow or red.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item
Description
Event Audio Settings
(VR-N1600U/E)
E Audio files For specifying the audio file to play back and
number of playbacks when an event is
triggered.
Specify the number of playbacks between
A1times
B
and A10timesB. You can also select
continuous playback to enable infinite loop
playback. Leave the field blank if you do not
want to designate a playback audio file for a
specific event.
This feature plays back a specific audio file from the designated
destination on the camera or this unit when a generic event
registered with this unit is triggered or when alarm signals are input
to the rear terminal. The Event Audio Settings screen enables you
to configure the above setting as well as other settings related to
the event audio feature.
F Start
Button on
[Audio files copy] Button
:Starts up the [Audio file utility] screen.
the
Different
Pages
1 Select [Event Audio Setting] from [Main Menu]
[Setting copy] Button
●
The [Event Audio Setting] screen appears.
:Starts up the [Setting copy] screen.
A
B
[Password setting] Button
C
D
:Starts up the [Password setting] screen.
[Communication setting] Button
E
F
:Starts up the [Communication setting]
G Audio
Displays a list of cameras or IP addresses
that are used as destinations of audio
playback files.
Select a destination to play back audio files
when an event is triggered from the list.
Select the check box of the camera to play
back audio sound.
playing for/
IPaddress
G
H
You can sort the list accordingly by clicking
[Audio playing for] or [IP address].
H Push To
Talk
Push to Talk is a feature that enables
transmission of audio sound to a camera that
supports bidirectional audio when the
microphone button is pressed down (when
Make signal is input to the [ALARM IN]
Item
A Event
Description
A list of events that can be used with the
event audio are displayed.
You can use up to a maximum of 100 events
(including both [External Alarm Terminal] and
[Multi Mode]). [Generic Event] that has been
configured on the [Camera Record Setting]
screen, [External Alarm Terminal] on the rear
panel of the VR-N1600U/E unit, as well as
[Multi Mode] are displayed.
terminal of this unit). (
To use this feature, select the external alarm
terminal on the rear panel of the
VR-N1600U/E unit.
Leave this blank if you are not using the
[Push To Talk] feature.
The action that is associated with the
[ALARM IN 1 to 8] terminals configured on
the [Camera Record Setting] screen are
disabled when the [Push To Talk] feature is in
use. (Only alarm input of the selected
terminal is disabled. Actions of terminals that
are not selected remain valid.)
Memo :
●
After setting an event for the external
alarm terminal of VR-N1600U/E, do not
delete the A[NVR](127.0.0.1)B audio input
of the main unit in [Camera Record
Setting]. Doing so clears the settings.
B Conditional The conditional expression of the [Generic
Event] selected in the [Event] item
displayed.
A
is
expression
C Renew
Updates the current settings of the event
audio feature, and closes the [Event Audio
Setting] screen.
D Cancel
Cancels all settings and closes the [Event
Audio Setting] screen.
Memo :
●
The password at the receiving end
specified on the [Password] screen
cannot be canceled.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Item
C Recording For entering the file name when you perform
recording using the microphone connected to
this unit. The [Recording (Stop)] button is
Description
Event Audio Settings
(VR-N1600U/E) (continued)
file neme
I
enabled once you have entered a file name.
D Audio
For selecting the camera for audio playback
during test play of audio files. Select a camera
by ticking the corresponding check box. You
can sort the order of the list accordingly by
clicking [Audio playing for] or [IP address].
playing for/
IPaddress
Audio Copying
This feature enables you to copy (register with this unit), delete,
perform test play, and record audio files used on the [Event Audio
Setting] screen. Format supported is G711 μ-law monaural sound.
E Close
Closes the [Audio file utility] screen.
The [Close] button cannot be selected during
addition, deletion, test play, or recording of an
audio file.
Playback time up to 300 seconds is supported.
Memo :
●
Set the audio file playback time to an interval not longer than 180
seconds.
F Audio files The G711μ-law monaural format audio files
stored on this unit are displayed.
1 Click [Audio files copy] on the [Event Audio
Memo :
Setting] screen
●
To stop playback while it is in progress,
press the [ALARM CLEAR] button.
●
The [Audio file utility] screen appears.
E
F
G Delete
To delete an audio file from the USB memory
device or this unit, select the audio file from
the [Flash memory] or [Audio files] list,
followed by clicking the [Delete] button. A
confirmation message appears, and the
selected audio file is deleted.
A
H Test pray
For performing test play of audio files using a
camera that supports bidirectional audio
sound or this unit.
(Stop)
B
C
G
H
I
Select an audio file from the [Flash memory]
or [Audio files] list, and press the [Test pray
(Stop)] button. Select the camera to use for
the test from the [Audio playing for] list
D.
When test play is in progress, the [Test pray]
button switches to a [Stop] button. To stop test
play while it is in progress, press the [Stop]
button.
When password authentication of the camera
receiving the audio file fails, the indicator of
the receiving camera lights up in red. When
connection with the camera receiving the
audio file fails, the indicator of the receiving
camera lights up in yellow. Playback time is
D
displayed in the [Recording file neme]
C
field
when playback is in progress.
Item
A Flash
memory
Description
As the audio playback is transmitted through
the network, the playback time displayed is
only a reference time. This may slightly differ
from the actual playback time.
The G711
μ
-law monaural format audio files
in the root folder of the USB memory device
connected to this unit are displayed.
I Recording Enables you to mix and record audio sound
B Add (Stop) Select one audio file from the [Flash memory]
list, and press [Add] to copy the audio file
input to the [AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2] terminal
of this unit by entering the file name in
(Stop)
inside the [Flash memory] to this unit. When
audio file copy is in progress, the [Add] button
switches to a [Stop] button. To stop copying of
the audio file, press the [Stop] button.
[Recording file neme]
C
and pressing the
[Recording] button. (Maximum duration: 180
seconds)
During recording, the [Recording] button
switches to a [Stop] button. To stop recording
while it is in progress, press the [Stop] button.
Recording time is displayed in the [Recording
Memo :
●
If an audio file with the same name
already exists on this unit, a confirmation
message asking whether you want to
overwrite the existing file appears.
file neme]
progress.
C
field when recording is in
●
You can add up to a maximum of 100
audio files to this unit. An error message
appears when the number of files exceeds
100, and copying cannot be performed.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Copy
This feature copies the settings of event audio associated with an
event (audio file name, destination of transmitted audio file, number
of deliveries) to another event.
Password
Enter the password to establish connection with the camera that
supports bidirectional audio. Audio transmission to the camera that
supports bidirectional audio will not be executed if the password
entered is incorrect.
1 Select the event to copy settings to (existing
settings are overwritten) from the [Audio playing
for] list on the [Event Audio Setting] screen
Memo :
●
To enter the password, you need to ensure that communication
of the selected camera on the network is enabled.
2 Click [Setting copy]
1 Select a camera from the [Audio playing for] list
●
The [Setting copy] screen appears.
on the [Event Audio Setting] screen
Memo :
●
To select a camera, click on the camera name to highlight the
display. Note that selecting the check box does not select the
camera.
A
2 Click [Password setting]
B
C
●
The [Password setting] screen appears.
Item
Description
A
B
C
A Source
event-
Select from the list the event to copy settings
from.
D
E
neme:
Click the [Copy] button to copy the settings.
After copy is complete, press the [Renew]
button on the [Event Audio Setting] screen to
enable the copied settings.
B Copy
Item
Description
A Camera
The name of the camera for entering the
password appears. You cannot alter the
[Camera name].
Closes the [Setting copy] screen without
executing copy.
C Cancel
name
The IP address of the camera for entering the
password appears. You cannot alter the
[IPaddress].
B IPaddress
C Password
For entering the camera password. The
default password appears during the first
entry.
Memo :
●
There is no default password for cameras
manufactured by AXIS. When using AXIS
cameras, you need to specify a camera
password in advance. For details, refer to
the [Instruction Manual] of the camera.
Authenticates the entered password. If
authentication is successful, the setting is
saved and the [Password setting] screen
closes automatically.
D OK
If the password entered is incorrect, or if
access to the camera fails such as when the
camera is not connected to the network, an
error message appears and the password
setting will not be saved.
Cancels password authentication on the
camera. Closes the [Password setting]
screen without saving the password setting.
E Cancel
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
Memo :
Event Audio Settings
(VR-N1600U/E) (continued)
●
To play back an audio file, register the event with [General Event
Settings] of [Camera Record Setting]. (
External device settings:
●
●
Set the port for receiving the event (51234) as the alarm
output (communication data for triggering the generic
event) destination port of the external device, such as
camera.
Set the IP address of this unit as the destination IP
address. However, note that the IP address of this unit is
not 127.0.0.1.
If the audio setting of the camera is set to the half duplex
mode, you will not be able to hear audio sound from the
camera during event audio transmission.
Communication Settings
●
●
To make use of the event audio feature, you need to receive the
communication data for triggering the generic event issued by an
external device using the event audio program, and transfer it to the
alert port of this unit.
for receiving communication data for triggering the generic event on
the [Communication setting] screen.
Note :
●
If you configure the camera event settings on the [I/O Setup]
Note :
screen of [Camera Record Setting] after alarm output setting for
the generic event at the camera is complete, information of the
existing generic event will be overwritten, and this may cause the
system to malfunction.
●
Do not alter the setting unless under special circumstances.
Altering the setting unnecessarily may cause the system to
malfunction.
●
Do not specify the same number for the [Event receive port] and
[Transfer port].
1 Click [Communication setting] on the [Event
Audio Setting] screen
●
The [Communication setting] screen appears.
D
E
A
B
C
Item
Description
A Event
receive
port
For specifying the port number for receiving
communication data for triggering the generic
event issued by an external device.
For specifying the port number to transfer
communication data to.
B Transfer
port
Memo :
●
Specify the same port as Main
Menu
Setup]
Settings]
B
B
[Camera Record Setting]
[Details] [Network
B[I/O
B
B
For specifying the IP address to transfer the
generic event to. (Specify the unit itself using
127.0.0.1)
C Transfer
IPaddress
Closes the [Communication setting] screen.
After setting is complete, press the [Renew]
button on the [Event Audio Setting] screen to
enable the new settings.
D OK
Closes the [Communication setting] screen
without doing anything.
E Cancel
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset
Values
Item
Description
HDD Meter
A Update
10
For specifying the time interval
interval
seconds (seconds) for updating.
(Range of 10 to 300 seconds)
B Transparency 0 %
For specifying the
transparency of the HDD
meter.
You can display the free space and usage rate of the
specified hard disk drive on the screen.
(Range of 0 to 90 %)
C Select drives OFF
Displays the built-in hard disk
drive and external USB hard
disk drive in a list.
Displaying the HDD Meter
to monitor
1 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [8] keypad button at the same time to
display the HDD meter on the top right corner of
the screen
Select the check box of the
hard disk drive to monitor.
Each drive is used for its
respective purpose as below.
C
M
: System disk
Setting
Button
: Saves the temporary
files of the CD/DVD
export data.
[HDD Meter] Screen
L
: Saves the operation
log.
Memo :
Others: Saves the recorded
images.
● To hide the HDD meter, press the [8] keypad button while
holding down the [FUNCTION] button.
● To move the display position of the HDD meter, left click
and drag it to the desired position.
D Alert
notification
setting
-
Displays only the hard disk
drive selected in C.
Ⅵ Changing the HDD Meter Settings
E Enable notify OFF
● Switches the alert
notification on or off. F can
be set only when this is
turned on.
● The alert message AFree
space of HDD less than
*GB (*drive)B will be
displayed.
You can press the [Settings] button on the [HDD meter]
screen to perform various settings such as specifying the
target hard disk drive or setting alerts.
Memo :
A
B
Specify the alert notification
method (dialog or email) in
Unit Setting 1.
F Notify when 5 GB
the free-
An alert will occur when the
amount of free space falls
below the specified size.
C
space less
than
Free space can be set in the
range 1 to 999 GB.
D
E
F
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
6 Press [Copy extension MIB onto the flash
Setting SNMP
memory] in the [SNMP setting] section
● The MIB extension information is copied to a flash
memory device.
3
4
When SNMP is enabled, the status of this unit can be
monitored from the SNMP manager of the surveillance
computer. The MIB extension information (JVCNVRMIB.txt)
must be registered to the SNMP manager.
5
6
1 Insert a commercially available flash memory
device into the serial terminal
[Unit Setting 2] Screen
2 Select [Unit Setting 2] from the main menu
7 Register the MIB extension information to the
SNMP manager of the surveillance computer
● To register the MIB extension information to the
surveillance computer, refer to the instruction manual
of the SNMP manager.
2
8 Specify the surveillance (polling) settings for the
SNMP manager of the surveillance computer
● For details on how to set, refer to the instruction
manual of the SNMP manager.
from this unit.
[Main Menu List] Screen
3 Select the [Enable of SNMP] check box in the
[SNMP setting] section
● To use TRAP, select the [Enable of TRAP] check box in
the [SNMP setting] section.
this unit.
4 Enter the IP address of the surveillance
computer in the [SNMP manager’s address] field
5 Specify the SNMP community name
Example) kanshi1
Note :
● Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used for the
community name.
● TRAP signals may be missed on the receiving end
depending on the communication specifications. Operate
with judgement based on polling primarily and make use
of TRAP only secondarily.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅵ List of Status that can be Obtained from this Unit
iso(1) - org(3) - dod(6) - internet(1) - private(4) - enterprises(1) - jvc(718) - nvr(916) - nvrObjects(1)
Group
Identifier
1
Name
Explanation
REC status
SYNTAX
INTEGER {
off(0),
on(1)
MAX-ACCESS UNITS
nvrRecStatus
read-only
read-only
-
}
INTEGER {
off(0),
recCtrl(1),
recAll(2)
}
2
nvrRecMode
-
REC mode
Current Value nvrStausGroup(1)
Latest alarm date
CPU usage rate
Writing rate to D
drive
3
4
nvrLastAlarmDate
nvrCpuUsage
DateAndTime
INTEGER(0..100)
INTEGER(0..
4294967295)
INTEGER {
stop(0),
read-only
read-only
-
%
Byte/
Sec
5
nvrDdriveWrite
read-only
Viewer execution
status
6
nvrRunViewer
read-only
-
-
-
run(1)
}
SEQUENCE OF
nvrWarningEntry
nvrWarningEntry
INDEX {
nvrWarningIndex
}
Table of last 10
warnings
1
nvrWarningTable
nvrWarningEntry
not-accessible
not-accessible
Entries of last 10
warnings
1.1
Warning List nvrWarningGroup(2)
1.1.1
1.1.2
nvrWarningIndex
nvrWarningDate
INTEGER(1..10)
read-only
read-only
-
-
-
-
Index of warning list
Dates when
warnings occurred
Warning information
Table of 32
DateAndTime
1.1.3
1
nvrWarningInfo
DisplayString
SEQUENCE OF
nvrRegistCameraEntry
nvrRegistCameraEntry
INDEX {
read-only
nvrRegistCameraTable
not-accessible
connected cameras
Entries of 32
connected cameras
1.1
nvrRegistCameraEntry
nvrRegCamIndex
not-accessible
read-only
-
-
nvrRegCamIndex
}
Index of connected
cameras list
1.1.1
INTEGER(1..32)
Camera List nvrCameraGroup(3)
IP addresses of
connected cameras
Camera names
1.1.2
1.1.3
nvrRegCamIpAddress IpAddress
read-only
read-only
-
-
nvrRegCamName
DisplayString
INTEGER {
disconnect(0),
connect(1)
}
nvrRegCamConnectio
n
Camera connection
status
1.1.4
read-only
-
Ⅵ List of TRAP Supported by this Unit
iso(1) - org(3) - dod(6) - internet(1) - private(4) - enterprises(1) - jvc(718) - nvr(916) - nvrTraps(2)
Identifier
Name
nvrRecStatusChange
Explanation
Notification of REC status change
OBJECTS
STATUS
current
nvrRecStatus,
nvrRecMode
nvrAlarmDate
1
2
Notification of alarm occurrence
Notification of warning occurrence
nvrNotifyAlarm
nvrNotifyWarning
current
current
nvrWarningIndex,
3
nvrWarningDate,
nvrWarningInfo
nvrNotifyCamConnect
nvrRegCamIndex,
nvrRegCamIpAddress,
nvrRegCamName,
nvrRegCamConnection
current
Notification of camera connection
status change
4
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Compatible Equipment
Connecting a UPS
Connecting an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to the hard disk
will protect it from damage by automatically shutting down all
operations prior to switching off the power supply in the event of a
power failure.
1 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [3/ ] keypad button at the same time
to start up the [UPS SetUp] screen
Make sure that peripheral devices are used in accordance with their
operating environment.
2 Select AUPS ModeB and press the [OK] button
Compatible Network Cameras
3 Connect the UPS communication cable to the
Function
PTZ
VMD Bidirectional Mega
JPG PTZ Audio
MPG4
[SERIAL] port on the rear panel
Joystick
Event
Audio
Pixel
IP cameras
JVC
VN-V25
R
R
4 Connect the power cable of this unit to the UPS
power output connector
JVC
VN-V26
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
5 Switch on the power of the UPS, followed by the
JVC
VN-V685
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
power of this unit
JVC
VN-V686
R
Note :
JVC
VN-V686B
●
●
●
●
Consult your nearest JVC dealer or service center for details on
the types of UPS that can be used.
Make sure that the UPS communication cable is connected
before switching on the power of this unit.
Do not disconnect the communication cable when operations
are in progress.
When a power failure occurs while formatting a hard disk or
archiving, subsequent operations may be affected even when a
UPS is connected.
R
R
R
R
R
JVC
VN-V686WPC
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
JVC
VN-V225/VP
R
JVC
VN-X235/VP
R
R
R
R
JVC
VN-C20
●
●
The recorded images may not be played back properly if they
JVC
VN-C655
R
R
R
R
R
R
are not archived before the power failure. (
If you are not using a UPS, do not select [UPS SetUp] on the the
[UPS SetUp] screen. Inappropriate selections may affect
subsequent operations.
JVC
VN-C625
JVC
VN-E4
R
R
R
R
JVC
VN-C215
External Hard Disk Drives
You can connect an external hard disk drive to the [SERIAL]
terminal at the rear of this unit. Up to two hard disks of capacity
500 GB, 1 TB or 2 TB can be combined and used together.
JVC
VN-X35
R
R
R
R
R
R
AXIS 206
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
AXIS 207
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
AXIS 209FD
AXIS 211
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
AXIS 212
R
R
R
R
R
R
Connecting the External Hard Disk Drive
AXIS 213
1 Press and hold the [OPERATE] button for
AXIS 214
R
R
AXIS 216
about2 seconds to turn off the power
AXIS 225
2 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel
Verint S1700
Verint S1704
Verint S1708
Verint S1900
Verint S2700E
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note :
●
Make sure that you turn off the power switch.
3 Connect the external hard disk drive to the
[SERIAL] port on the rear panel, and switch on
the power
Memo :
●
When VN-V685 and VN-V686B are registered to NVR, do not
enable the audio device although it is displayed. If it is enabled,
camera images may not be displayed correctly.
VN-V686WPC may be recognized by NVR as VN-V686B, but
this is normal. WPC works normally even if the audio device is
enabled.
●
Make sure that you switch on the power to the external
hard disk drive before switching on this unit. The system
may not recognize the external drive if it is not switched on
beforehand.
●
●
●
When VN-X35 is used, make sure that the firmware version of
VN-X35 is V2.00 or a newer version.
When sending out audio data to VN-V26U, make sure that the
firmware version of VN-V26U is 1.01 or a newer version.
(VR-N1600U/E)
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Switch on the power of this unit
Note :
●
●
●
Consult your nearest JVC dealer or service center for details on
●
If recording is in progress, a [New HDD was found. Are
you OK to stop recording and format new HDD?]
confirmation message appears.
the type of external hard disk drive that can be used.
When an additional hard disk is connected, several seconds of
the recorded image may be lost during archiving.
Note that playing back video recorded in an external HDD
simultaneously on this unit and multiple clients may cause delay
in the playback of video images and audio sound.
This is not a malfunction and there is no problem with the
recorded images. Normal playback will be restored when
simultaneous playback stops or when the number of devices
playing back at the same time decreases.
●
Upon clicking [OK], a multipartition confirmation screen
appears. (Only when the VR-D series is used)
Memo :
●
It is recommended that a UPS be used to ensure stable
operation of the system.
●
You are unable to view recorded images on the computer by
disconnecting the external hard disk from this unit and
connecting it to the computer.
NAS
NAS is a dedicated file server that is connected to the network.
In the case of NVR, you can specify NAS as a drive for archiving
data.
Memo :
●
Click [OK] to start multipartition. The HDD Utility starts up
●
For details on the settings of this unit when using NAS, refer to
●
Follow the NAS [Instruction Manual] for settings on NAS. This
may take a while depending on the format and RAID settings.
For further details, please contact the NAS manufacturer.
Memo :
●
External hard disk drives can be used without multipartition.
However, if any one of the hard disks in VR-D breaks down, all
data in VR-D will be corrupted.
●
●
Use each of the “unformat disk” in HDD Utility to perform
initialization.
The confirmation message will only appear during
recording.
5 Check the entry in the [Volume] field, and click
the [Initialize] button
●
●
The external hard disk drive is initialized.
Check to ensure that the [Volume] field is set to [unformat
disk], [unpartition disk] and [unknown partition]. Selecting
any other volume may result in the deletion of recorded
data.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Special Key Operations
Pressing a Button for Two Seconds or
Longer
Ⅵ [REC CONTROL]
Turns on/off the recording control mode.
Combining a Button with the [FUNCTION]
Button
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [REC CONTROL]
Ⅵ [ALARM CLEAR]
The light of the [WARNING] indicator goes off.
Displays the main menu.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [LIVE/BROWSE]
Logs out of the system.
Memo :
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [LIVE/BROWSE](VR-N1600U/E)
[FUNCTION] + [ALARM CLEAR] +
[SELECT](VR-N900U)
Reboots the NVR Viewer internal distribution server.
●
When [Auto Logon] is enabled, the login operation starts
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [KEY]
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [OPERATE]
Locks/Unlocks the panel operation.
Shuts down the system forcibly.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [1]
Displays/Hides the performance meter.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [2]
Displays/Hides the clock.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [3]
Enables/Disables UPS.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [4]
For use when writing data to a CD-R.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [5]
For controlling the PTZ camera.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [6]
Displays the maintenance information screen.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [7](VR-N1600U/E)
For sending audio sound to a camera that supports
bidirectional audio.
Ⅵ [FUNCTION] + [8]
Displays/Hides the HDD meter.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Before/After
Occurrence of Event or
Motion
PTZ Camera Control
You can record images before and after the occurrence of an event
or motion when recording in the recording control mode
Connecting the PTZ camera to the COM port of the network
encoder (VN-E4) enables the PTZ control on the live screen of the
NVR Viewer. For details on PTZ camera settings, refer to [PTZ
For cameras that have specified the [JCBP-S] protocol in
type controlled through COM1/COM2 of [PTZ Camera Settings
(COM1/COM2)], control of the iris, focus and camera menu are also
enabled on the live screen of the NVR Viewer in addition to PTZ
control.
AP/T/Z
B
Motion or event
Stopped
Stopped
Records for set time before
Set time
Records for set time after
Set time
Memo :
●
A PTZ camera is an analog camera with an analog output that
enables PTZ control via RS-485.
AConditionallyB in [Recording Settings]-[When
to store images in database]
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
LOCK
2 Select AOn motionB or AOn eventB
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
3 Specify the number of seconds in [( )seconds
pre/post recordings on motion/event]
[5] Button
[FUNCTION] Button
●
Images are recorded during the specified time interval
before and after an alarm or motion is detected.
1 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [5] keypad button at the same time
●
The [Camera Control] screen appears.
2 Select the camera you want to control from the
camera selection list, and click the
[Connect(ENTER)] button
2
3
1
●
●
Camera control is enabled.
The functions of the buttons are described below.
Memo :
●
Sequences refers to sequences of images that are recorded
when an event or motion is detected.
●
For details on using sequences, refer to [Searching Recorded
[NVR]
2
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Ⅵ Menu
PTZ Camera Control
(continued)
: Displays the PTZ camera menu
: Selects the PTZ camera menu
: PTZ camera’s menu (Up cursor)
: PTZ camera’s menu (Down cursor)
: PTZ camera’s menu (Right cursor)
: PTZ camera’s menu (Left cursor)
Ⅵ Pan/Tilt
: Tilts the camera upwards
: Tilts the camera downwards
: Pans the camera to the right
: Pans the camera to the left
Ⅵ Zoom
Ⅵ Exit
Exits PTZ camera control
Memo :
●
●
You can use the [SKIP] buttons to change the item to control.
You can also use the cursor buttons on the keypad to control
movement in the direction indicated by the respective buttons.
You can use the [13/CANCEL](ZOOM OUT/CANCEL) button to
●
: Zooms out
exit the PTZ camera control mode.
`
: Zooms in
Note :
●
If you are unable to establish connection with the camera by
clicking the [Connect(ENTER)] button, try again after stopping
and rebooting the recording server.
Ⅵ Iris
: Opens the iris
: Closes the iris
Ⅵ Focus
: Sets the focus to a distant position
: Focuses automatically
: Sets the focus to a closer position
Ⅵ Speed
For setting the movement speed of the PTZ action to eight different
levels. (1 represents the slowest speed)
Ⅵ Preset
Position Selection : Select HOME or a different position.
For moving to the position selected using
Position Selection
:
For registering a position selected using
Position Selection as the current position
:
Ⅵ Scene
Scene
: For selecting a scene between A to H.
Selection
For setting a scene selected using Scene
Selection
:
Ⅵ Night Mode
: Turns on the night mode
: Turns off the night mode
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display and Saving of
Maintenance Information
This section describes procedures for displaying various
information.
1 Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button, and
press the [6/HOME](5/HOME) keypad button at
the same time
`
●
The [Maintenance Information] screen appears.
A
B
T VR-N1600U/E
only
C
Item
Description
A Power Failure The power failure history appears. The
[Power Failure History] is empty if no
power failure has occurred in the past.
History
B Information
Screen
Resolution
Displays the screen resolution.
This is expressed in units of
x horizontal pixel
Avertical pixel
B
.
Operating Time
(VR-N1600U/E)
Displays the total operating time of
VR-N1600U/E.
This is expressed in the
A
hours:minutes:secondsB format.
C Close
Closes the [Maintenance Information]
screen.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Export Viewer
You can view data exported to a USB memory device, CD-R/RW, or
DVD/R-RW on the computer.
Double-
click
Starting the Export Viewer
1 Insert the USB memory device containing the
exported data into the USB port of the computer
●
The USB memory device is automatically recognized by
the computer as a removable disk.
2 Go to the Start menu, and select [Windows
Explorer] in [All Programs]-[Accessories]
●
The [Windows Explorer] appears.
3 Select the [Exported Images] folder in the
removable disk from the folder list in the
Explorer.
●
The exported folder appears on the list on the right.
[Milestone XProtect Viewer] Screen
List
Select
******
******
******
******
Memo :
●
The name of the exported folder is indicated as follows. The date
in the folder name indicates the time interval of export.
●
[YYYYMMDDhhmmss_YYYYMMDDhhmmss] _[Camera
Model] Camera name
4 Double-click the data folder in the list on the
right side of the Explorer
●
A file list appears in the right list.
5 Double-click [Browser.exe] in the list on the right
side of the Explorer
●
When using Windows Vista, right-click the icon and select
Run as administrator to activate Browser.exe.
The Export Viewer starts up.
A
B
●
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Exported Data
Data Playback/Stopping Data Playback
Ⅵ Playback
Ⅵ Viewing Data on a Specific Date/Time Using
Date/Time Selection
1 Set the playback speed using the speed control
1 Click the [K] button for date selection
2 Click the Play button
●
A calendar appears.
●
The database is played back at the specified speed.
Click
Speed Control
Calendar
2 Select a specific date from the calendar
Play Button
Stop Button
●
Image on the selected date appears.
3 Click the [K] button for time selection, and
Ⅵ Stopping Playback
select a specific time
1 Click the Stop button
●
Image of the selected time appears.
●
Data playback stops.
Exiting the Export Viewer
Click
1 Go to the Start menu, and select [File]-[Close]
●
Ends the Export Viewer.
Memo :
●
You can also click [
Export Viewer.
ן ] on the right side of the screen to exit the ●
For details of the viewer, refer to the Milestone XProtect Smart
Client User’s Manual available on the website of Milestone
Systems (http://www.milestonesys.com).
Ⅵ Viewing Data on a Specific Date/Time Using
●
The URL address may be subject to changes.
Timeline
The vertical timeline indicates the progress status of a recording
operation.
Timeline
1 Drag the mouse pointer upwards or downwards
on the Timeline
●
You can view data at the specified date/time while
checking the images.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Item
A Invert
Description
Customizing Joystick
Settings
By default, the PTZ camera moves to the
right when you push the joystick to the right
along the X-axis, and moves up when you
pull the joystick towards you along the Y-
axis. The movements are reversed if you
select [Invert].
1 Click the [K] button at the top right corner of the
B Absolute
C Action
By selecting AAbsoluteB, the angle of the
joystick corresponds to the direction of the
camera.
screen
For specifying the action when you move
the joystick.
[K] Button
PTZ Pan
PTZ Tilt
Moves the camera horizontally
Moves the camera vertically
Zooms in or zooms out the camera
No action
PTZ Zoom
No Action
2 Select [Joystick Setup] from the menu that
D Preview
You can check how each camera moves on
each axis with the joystick.
appears
Image
3 Select a joystick from the selected joystick list
5 Assign an action to each joystick button in the
A
B
C
D
[Button Setup] section
●
Select the action to assign in the [Action] field.
[Joystick] List
Disabling Joystick Operation
To disable the joystick operation, select the [Disable all joysticks]
[Axis Setup] Section
check box.
[Button Setup] Section
4 Specify the settings for each axis in the [Axis
Setup] section
Z-axis
X-axis
Y-axis
Joystick
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Click [Main Menu]-[Camera Record Setting]-
Configuring NAS
●
The [Archive Setup] screen appears.
8 Deselect the [Automatic path selection] check
box
1 Click [HDD Utility] under [Main Menu]
●
The [HDD Utility] screen appears.
8
2 Click [Details]
3 Enter the [User name] and [Password] that are
configured on the NAS device for access to NAS
in [NAS User Settings], and click [Set]
4 Enter the IP address and shared name of the
NAS device in the format of A IP Address
shared nameB in the [Address] field under [NAS
Drive], followed by clicking [Add]
[Archive Setup] Screen
Example)
192.168.0.200
9 Configure each drive as destinations for storing
5 If the NAS device is the only device for
recording images, deselect the [Enable
archiving to internal HDD] check box
images of the respective cameras.
Note :
●
●
●
●
Performing the above setting only after the NAS device setting is
complete and when the device is connected to the network.
If you change the archive destination after applying the setting,
playback of previously archived data will fail.
The configurable items may differ according to the camera in
use.
6 Click [Close]
[HDD Utility] Screen
Specify the user name with a different name from the [OS
Page 73) host name under the user setting for NAS
connection.
Note :
●
After configuring the NAS drive, an error message will appear on
the NVR Viewer for several minutes, and live images may not be
displayed during this interval.
2
3
4
5
6
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Recording Time Schedule
(VR-N1600U/E)
The actual recording time varies according to the camera settings, input image content, and condition of the hard disk.
Use the tables below as a guide to the recording time.
● 16 Channel Recording/No Audio Recording/No Additional HDD
[Hour]
Image
Size
VGA
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
1211
Picture
Quality
Settings
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
14
20
24
31
18
33
64
103
22
30
37
46
26
50
96
155
43
60
73
93
53
99
191
310
72
100
122
155
88
166
319
517
223
305
371
470
269
503
963
1556
470
635
767
964
561
1623
1953
2447
1439
2609
4913
7875
QVGA
1029
1951
3136
5.0
● 16 Channel Recording/2 Channel Audio Recording/No Additional HDD
[Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
VGA
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
14
20
24
31
17
33
63
102
22
30
36
46
26
49
95
152
43
59
72
92
52
98
187
298
72
98
120
151
86
162
306
484
216
292
353
441
258
470
854
1293
441
584
695
855
521
905
1556
2233
1044
1339
1557
1859
1210
1951
3014
3926
QVGA
5.0
● 16 Channel Recording/No Audio Recording/External HDD (1 TB
ן 1 Unit) [Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
VGA
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
49
67
80
101
59
108
204
327
74
100
120
151
88
162
306
491
148
200
241
303
177
323
611
981
247
333
401
504
295
538
1018
1635
747
1004
1210
1519
890
1621
3061
4912
1519
2033
2444
3061
1804
3267
6147
9849
3833
5118
6147
7689
4547
8203
15402
24658
QVGA
5.0
● 16 Channel Recording/2 Channel Audio Recording/External HDD (1 TB
ן 1 Unit) [Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
VGA
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
49
66
80
100
59
107
202
323
74
99
120
150
88
160
302
481
147
198
238
299
175
319
596
943
244
328
395
494
291
527
977
1533
724
963
1151
1428
858
1519
2718
4090
1428
1875
2220
2718
1678
2880
4912
7028
3311
4232
4912
5853
3833
6147
9469
12317
QVGA
5.0
Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format.
Note :
24 to 168
1 day to 1 week
169 to 720
1 week to 1
month
721 to 2160
1 month to 3
months
2161 or more
3 months or
longer
●
Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10 %
according to the condition of the hard disk and the images
recorded.
●
Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● 8 Channel Recording/No Audio Recording/No Additional HDD
[Hour]
Image
Size
VGA
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
2446
Picture
Quality
Settings
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
15
21
25
32
19
34
65
104
31
42
51
64
37
68
130
209
46
63
76
96
56
102
194
313
93
126
152
192
111
205
389
626
155
210
253
319
185
341
648
1044
470
635
766
964
562
1030
1685
3138
964
1293
1557
1952
1147
2084
3925
6299
3269
3928
4916
2904
5246
9847
15785
QVGA
5.0
● 8 Channel Recording/2 Channel Audio Recording/No Additional HDD
[Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
VGA
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
15
21
25
32
18
34
64
103
31
42
50
63
37
68
128
203
46
62
75
95
55
101
190
301
92
124
149
187
109
199
370
580
151
204
245
306
180
326
598
920
441
584
695
854
521
906
1557
2234
854
1105
1293
1557
996
1640
2611
3489
1858
2301
2611
3016
2112
3138
4367
5246
QVGA
5.0
● 8 Channel Recording/No Audio Recording/External HDD (1 TB
ן 1 Unit) [Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
VGA
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
50
68
81
102
60
109
205
328
101
135
163
204
120
217
409
656
151
203
244
305
180
326
614
984
303
405
488
611
360
652
1228
1968
504
676
813
1018
599
1087
2047
3281
1519
2033
2444
3061
1804
3267
6146
9848
3061
4089
4912
6146
3632
6557
12316
19720
7689
10259
12316
15401
9117
16429
30826
49336
QVGA
5.0
● 8 Channel Recording/2 Channel Audio Recording/External HDD (1 TB
ן 1 Unit) [Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image [kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
VGA
32.0
24.0
20.0
16.0
27.0
15.0
8.0
50
67
81
101
60
108
203
324
100
134
161
202
119
215
403
639
150
201
241
302
178
322
599
946
299
399
478
596
354
635
1169
1822
494
657
786
977
585
1040
1888
2894
1428
1874
2220
2718
1678
2880
4912
7027
2718
3502
4089
4912
3161
5172
8203
10945
5852
7235
8203
9468
6648
9848
13687
16429
QVGA
5.0
Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format.
24 to 168
1 day to 1
week
169 to 720
1 week to 1
month
721 to 2160
1 month to 3
months
2161 or more
3 months or
longer
Note :
●
Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10 %
according to the condition of the hard disk and the images
recorded.
●
Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Recording Time Schedule
(VN-N900)
The actual recording time varies according to the camera settings, input image content, and condition of the hard disk.
Use the tables below as a guide to the recording time.
ⅷ 9 channel recording without audio recording or additional HDD upgrade
[Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image
[kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
40
54
82
134
48
88
79
108
165
267
95
176
336
541
132
180
275
446
159
294
560
901
403
546
830
1343
482
887
830
1115
1685
2710
989
1799
3393
5444
2112
2824
4248
6811
2507
4533
8520
VGA
QVGA
168
270
1685
2710
5
13646
ⅷ 9 channel recording with 2 channel audio recording and without additional HDD upgrade
[Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image
[kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
39
54
81
131
47
87
78
106
161
258
94
172
321
504
130
175
265
420
155
282
520
805
381
506
745
1137
451
791
745
968
1374
1993
871
1449
2342
3172
1648
2054
2722
3594
1880
2837
4023
4897
VGA
QVGA
164
261
1374
1993
5
ⅷ 9 channel recording without audio recording and with one additional 1 TB HDD upgrade
[Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image
[kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
133
178
269
432
158
287
541
867
266
356
538
864
316
574
1081
1734
443
594
896
1440
527
957
1335
1788
2694
4325
1587
2876
5413
8675
2694
3600
5413
8675
3198
5775
6772
9037
13568
21723
8030
14474
27159
43469
VGA
QVGA
1802
2890
10849
17373
5
ⅷ 9 channel recording with 2 channel audio recording and one additional 1 TB HDD upgrade
[Hour]
Image
Size
Data/Image
[kB]
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
132
177
266
424
157
284
529
837
263
351
526
834
312
560
1035
1618
435
580
864
1359
515
920
1264
1663
2423
3669
1487
2568
4424
6393
2423
3133
4424
6393
2823
4664
7504
5294
6588
8714
11489
6035
9079
VGA
QVGA
1677
2582
12852
15634
5
10143
Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format.
Note :
24 to 168
1 day to 1 week
169 to 720
1 week to 1
month
721 to 2160
1 month to 3
months
2161 or more
3 months or
longer
●
Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10 % according
to the condition of the hard disk and the images recorded.
Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk.
●
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ 4 Channel Recording/No Audio Recording/No Additional HDD
[Hour]
Image
Size
VGA
Data/Image
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
1898
0.2
4781
6382
9586
15352
5671
10226
19195
[kB]
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
Picture
Quality
Settings
31
42
63
102
37
67
62
83
126
203
74
93
125
189
305
111
202
381
186
250
378
609
222
404
763
310
417
631
1015
370
673
937
1257
1898
3051
1115
2026
3820
2539
3820
6126
2254
4076
7664
QVGA
135
254
127
1271
ⅷ 4 Channel Recording/2 Channel Audio Recording/No Additional HDD
[Hour]
Image
Size
VGA
Data/Image
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
0.2
[kB]
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
Picture
Quality
Settings
31
41
63
100
37
67
62
82
124
198
73
132
246
387
92
123
185
293
109
197
363
566
182
242
360
563
215
383
693
1054
298
395
581
894
352
618
1088
1608
830
1074
1514
2173
968
1594
2539
3393
1514
1898
2539
3393
1733
2650
3820
4707
2933
3470
4247
5101
3247
4369
5467
6126
QVGA
125
199
5
ⅷ 4 Channel Recording/No Audio Recording/Additional HDD (1 TB x 1 Unit)
[Hour]
Image
Size
VGA
Data/Image
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
6092
8131
12208
19547
7224
13023
24440
39118
0.2
[kB]
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
Picture
Quality
Settings
101
135
203
325
120
216
407
651
202
270
406
650
240
433
813
303
405
609
976
359
649
606
809
1217
1951
719
1299
2440
3908
1009
1349
2029
3252
1198
2165
4067
6514
3034
4053
6092
9761
3600
6500
15266
20362
30555
48903
18097
32594
61135
97830
QVGA
1220
1954
12208
19547
5
1303
ⅷ 4 Channel Recording/2 Channel Audio Recording/Additional HDD (1 TB x 1 Unit)
[Hour]
Image
Size
VGA
Data/Image
Frame rate per channel, per second [ips]
[kB]
32
24
16
10
27
15
8
30
15
10
5
3
1
0.5
4869
6092
8131
10849
5568
8485
12208
15031
0.2
Picture
Quality
Settings
101
134
201
321
119
215
400
634
200
267
399
633
237
425
787
299
398
594
938
354
632
591
783
1159
1806
698
1233
2218
3368
969
1278
1872
2868
1141
1987
3485
5140
2694
3471
4869
6966
3133
5126
8131
9385
11096
13567
16285
10386
13955
17450
19547
QVGA
1162
1809
5
1237
10849
Recording time in the chart is calculated based on recording in the JPEG format.
Note :
24 to 168
1 day to 1 week
169 to 720
1 week to 1
month
721 to 2160
1 month to 3
months
2161 or more
3 months or
longer
●
Recording time may be shortened by approximately 10 %
according to the condition of the hard disk and the images
recorded.
●
Recording time may be shortened due to aging of the hard disk.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Default Value List
[ ] : Factory Settings
[Always Online]
[Always Offline]
[Always Offline]
[Always Offline]
Online
Enable speedup
E-mail
Patrolling
PTZ Camera Section
Some of the connected cameras are Pna/Tilt/Zoom cameras
Camera Type
[Not Selected]
[Fixed]
Speedup Settings
Frame Rate
Frame/
[8]
[Sec.] /Min. /Hour
Recording Settings
Desired framerate
[8]
Frame/
[Sec.] /Min. /Hour
[Not Selected]
Always /Never /[Conditionally]
[Selected]
Enable speedup
When to store images in database
On motion
On event
[Not Selected]
[3]
( )seconds pre/post recordings on motion/event
Max.records in database
[Selected] [108000]
[Not Selected]
[Selected]
Max timespan in database
Archive automatically when database is full
In case of database failure the following action syould be taken
Repair,Scan,Delete if fails /Repair,Delete if fails /
Archive if fails /Delete(no repair) /Archive(no
repair)
Presets
Use preset positions from device
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
Preset Position on Events
Preset Position on Events
Patrol scheme
[My patrol sheme]
PTZ Patrolling Schedule Settings
Stay at each position in the patrol schedule(in seconds)
[5]
[3]
Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete(in seconds). Motion detection is
disabled during movement.
Motion-Triggered PTZ Patrolling Settings
Disable patrolling schedule if motion is detected
[Not Selected]
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensitivity
[40]
Motion Sensitivity
[640]
Milestone XProtect Central Settings
Enable Milestone XProtect Central Connections
[Not Selected]
[30]
Patrolling Settings
Resume Patrol after Manual or Event PTZ(sec.)
Logfile Settings
Logfile Path
Days to log
[L:¥Log¥MS]
[5]
Event Recording Settings
Path
[D:¥Events¥]
[5]
Days to keep
Advanced...
Don't send e-mail on camera failures
Start cameras on remote live requests
Create default schedule for new cameras
[Not Selected]
[Selected]
[Selected]
E-Mail settings
Enable E-mail(Monitor)
[Not Selected]
Delet databases in the backup directory older then [ ] days
Send email on archive error
[9999]
[Selected]
[Selected]
[12:00:00]
All [Selected]
Automatic path selection
Daily archiving times
Name
Image Quality...
[Full] /Super High(for megapixel) /High /Medium /
Low
Frame Rate
[Unlimited] /Medium /Low
[Selected]
Maintain Image Aspect Ration
Update on motion only
Sound on Event
[Not Selected]
[Always off] /Always on
[Always off] /Always on
Sound on Event
Disable all joysticks
[Not Selected]
Axis Setup
Invert
Absolute
Action
X Axis
Y Axis
Z Axis
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
PTZ Zoom /PTZ Tilt /[PTZ Pan] /No Action
PTZ Zoom /[PTZ Tilt] /PTZ Pan /No Action
[PTZ Zoom] /PTZ Tilt /PTZ Pan /No Action
Button Setup
Buttons 1 to 12
[No Action]
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Default Value List
(continued)
Password
[None]
Auto Logon
[Selected]
Live
Live viewing Auto Start
[Selected]
Error Report
Dialog
[Selected]
[Selected]
Mail
Record Control
ON at startup
[Selected]
Mail Server
SMTP Server
POP Server
Port[25]
Port[110]
SMTP Authentication
[NONE]/SMTP Authentication/POP before SMTP
Emergency Record
Time of Record
NONE /30seconds/[60seconds]/5minutes/
10minutes/10minutes/Continue
Encode Mode (VR-N900U)
Encode Mode
Variable File Size/[Average File Size]/
Constant File Size
Interpolate
[Selected]
Serial (VR-N900U)
Speed
1200/1800/2400/4800/[9600]/19200/4800/19200/
38400
Data Lenght
Parity
7/[8]
[NONE]/ODD/EVEN
[1]/2
Stop Bit
HDD meter
Display at startup
[Not Selected]
Clock setting
Display at startup
Display at date
Display at second
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
SNMP setting
Enable of SNMP
Enable of TRAP
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
- (IP address)
SNMP manager’s address
Community name
- (1 to 32 characters. Alphanumeric characters
only.)
Confirmation interval of alarm
10 seconds (10 to 9999 seconds)
10 seconds (10 to 9999 seconds)
60 seconds (30 to 9999 seconds)
10 seconds (10 to 9999 seconds)
60 seconds (30 to 9999 seconds)
Confirmation interval of CPU usage
Confirmation interval of D-drive
Confirmation interval of NVR Viewer
Confirmation interval of camera
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Adapter Interface Name
Intel 82566DM Gigabit Network: LAN1 (Camera Network) (VR-N1600U/E)
ா
Realtek RTL8168C(P)/8111C(P) PCI-E Gigabit Ethernet NIC: LAN1 (Camera Network) (VR-N1600U/E(A))
Realtek RTL8169/8110 Family Gigabit Ethernet NIC: LAN1 (Camera Network) (VR-N900U)
Obtain an IP address automatically
IP address
[Not Selected]
[192.168.0.253]
[255.255.255.0]
[0.0.0.0]
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Perferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server
Host Name
[0.0.0.0]
[0.0.0.0]
[vr-n1600]/[vr-n900]
[None]
DNS Domain Name
Intel
ீ8225xER PCI Adapter: LAN2 (Intranet), (VR-N1600U/E), (VR-N900U)
Realtek RTL8168C(P)/8111C(P) PCI-E Gigabit Ethernet NIC#2: LAN2 (Intranet), (VR-N1600U/E(A))
Obtain an IP address automatically
IP address
[Not Selected]
[192.168.1.253]
[255.255.255.0]
[192.168.1.254]
[0.0.0.0]
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Perferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server
Host Name
[0.0.0.0]
[vr-n1600]
DNS Domain Name
[None]
Enc Board Bus Master Driver: Analog Camera Network (VR-N900U)
Obtain an IP address automatically
IP address
[Not Selected]
[192.168.201.253]
[255.255.255.0]
[0.0.0.0]
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Perferred DNS Server
Alternate DNS Server
Host Name
[0.0.0.0]
[0.0.0.0]
[vr-n900]
DNS Domain Name
[None]
Day and Time Properties
Automatically synchronize with an Internet server
Time Zone
[Not Selected]
[(GMT-05:00) Eastern Time](VR-1600U/VR-N900U)
[(GMT) Greenwich Mean Time](VR-1600E)
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Default Value List
(continued)
IP Lease
[Enable] /Disable
IP Lease Parameter
Start Address
Unit
[192.168.0.100]
1 Unit to/[20Units]/to 99 Units
[255.255.255.0]
Subnet Mask
Gateway
[192.168.0.254]
DNS Server
Primary
[192.168.0.253]
[192.168.0.252]
[None]
Secondry
Domain Name
Lease Time Limit
Client
[No] /Yes
[Only Camera] /Any Client
[None]
Reserve MAC Address
Server Configuration
Name
[Server]
[80]
Port
Enable Outside IP Address
Max,number of clients
[Not Selected]
[11]
User Administration
Full access for all users
[Selected]
Master/Slave Setup
Designate as Master Server
Pre-6.0 Version Slaves
[Not Selected]
[Not Selected]
Log Files
Days to log
[10]
Audit Log
Audit Log
Enable Audit Logging/[Not Selected]
[Western(European)(iso-8859-1)]
Language Support and XML Encoding
Language
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VR-N1600U/E
User
Password
[vr-n1600]
[None]
Type
vr-n1600
Basic user
Administrator
VR-N900U
User
[Windows or Active Directory user]
Password
[vr-n900]
[None]
Type
vr-n900
Basic user
Administrator
[Windows or Active Directory user]
NAS User Settings
Password
[None]
[None]
User name
Auto Archive
Enable archiving to internal HDD
[Selected]
Monitor settings
Update interval
10 seconds (10 to 300 seconds)
Transparency
[Selected]
OFF
Select drives to monitor
Alarm notification settings
Enable notify
OFF (ON/OFF)
Notify when the free-space less than
5 GB (1 to 999 GB)
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Action
Power cannot be turned on.
Check to ensure that the power cable has been plugged in correctly.
Check to ensure that the power switch on the rear panel is switched on.
Camera is not automatically detected.
Follow instructions in the camera’s [Instruction Manual] to check the IP address
settings.
When the IP Lease feature is in use, turn OFF the camera and ON again with this unit
started up.
Unable to control using [REC] and [PLAY].
Check to ensure that the operation lock is not turned on.
Images are not recorded in the recording control
mode.
Check the [Camera Recording Settings].
Check to ensure that the scheduler is set to online.
Check to ensure that the camera is in the recording control mode.
Unable to play back audio sound.
Operation of the unit is disabled.
Check to ensure that the audio item of the camera device is set to
[Camera Record Setting] menu.
Check to ensure that audio is selected in [Audio].
AEnabledB in the
Press and hold the [FUNCTION] button on the front panel, and press the [OPERATE]
button for 7 seconds or longer to shut down the power forcibly.
Memo :
●
When the power is forcibly shut down, recorded images that are not archived
Page 108) may not be properly played back.
The message below appears after turning on the
power.
The built-in backup battery level is running low.
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.
A
COMS Settings Wrong CMOS Date/ Time Not Press
F1 to Run SETUP Press F2 to load default values
and continue
B
Ⅵ Actions when Warning Indicator Lights Up
Error Message
Action to Take
Free space of HDD less than *GB (*drive)
If this message is displayed for the D drive, try to recover using HDD Utility.
Replacement is recommended. Consult your nearest JVC dealer.
WARNING:HDD(Disk)
HDD was removed
The HDD seems is no longer serviceable. Replacement is recommended.
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.
Check to ensure that the power of the external HDD is switched on.
Check to ensure that the connecting cable is properly inserted.
If no abnormality is found above, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
WARNING:HDD(Raid)
This is a hard disk (during RAID setting) warning.
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.
WARNING:HDD(xxx:) Disconnect
The NAS drive is disconnected.
Check the operation of NAS.
Check the connection with NAS.
FAN STOP
Fan abnormality. Check to ensure that the fan is running.
If the fan is not moving, stop using it.
Otherwise, it may break down.
Consult your nearest JVC dealer.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When not viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 240 ips/0 ips/80 ips (VR-N1600U/E)
Specifications
: Up to 240 ips/0 ips/160 ips
(VR-N1600U/E(A)) (When NVR Viewer is
not started up)
When using NAS
When viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 80 ips/80 ips/80 ips (VR-N1600U/E)
VR-N1600U/E
: Up to 80 ips/160 ips/160 ips
(VR-N1600U/E(A))
Ⅵ General
Allowable Operating Temperature
: 5 I to 40 I
When not viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 80 ips/0 ips/80 ips (VR-N1600U/E)
Allowable Storage Temperature
: -20 I to 60 I
: Up to 80 ips/0 ips/160 ips
(VR-N1600U/E(A))
Allowable Operating Humidity
: 30 % to 80 %
Ⅵ Attachments/Accessories
VR-1600U
Power Supply
Start-up Guide....................................... 1
CD-ROM................................................ 1
Power Cord (2 m) .................................. 1
Rack Mount Bracket .............................. 2
Warranty Card ....................................... 1
Service Information Card....................... 1
Screw (M4
ן 10 mm).............................. 4 Screw (M5
ן 11 mm).............................. 4 VR-1600U
VR-1600E
: AC 120 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
: AC 220 - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption
VR-1600U
VR-1600E
Mass
: 1.2 A
: 0.8 A
: Approx. 7.8 kg
Ⅵ Interface
Network
LAN1
: RJ-45
ן 2 VR-1600E
: 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
: 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
: USB2.0 A-type (or equivalent)
ן 5 : Up to 1600
ן 1200 Start-up Guide....................................... 1
CD-ROM................................................ 1
Power Cord (2 m) .................................. 2
Rack Mount Bracket .............................. 2
Screw (M4
ן 10 mm).............................. 4 Screw (M5
ן 11 mm).............................. 4 LAN2
Serial
VGA Output
Audio Input
: Analog audio RCA
ן 2 - 8 dBs 50 kK (Unbalanced)
Audio Output : Analog audio RCA
ן 1 - 8 dBs 600 K (Unbalanced)
I/O Terminals : Push terminal
Input
ן 12 Ⅵ Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
Output
ן 5 GND
ן 3 Ⅵ Compression Format
Video
Audio
: JPEG/MPEG-4
: μ-law (64 kbps) A/D 8 bits, Fs = 8 kHz
Ⅵ Recording
HDD Capacity : 500 GB
ן 1 Ⅵ Recording/Displaying live images/Distribution
performance (for JPEG VGA 24 KB)
When viewing live images on NVR
420
: Up to 160 ips/80 ips/80 ips (VR-N1600U/E)
WARNING
㧝ꢀ
㧡ꢀ
㧥ꢀ
㧞ꢀ
㧢ꢀ*1/'
ꢁꢂꢀ
㧟ꢀ
㧣ꢀ
ꢁꢁꢀ
㧠
㧤
ꢁꢃ
LIVE/BROWSE
SELECT
ALARM
HDD
OPERATE
REV
FWD
: Up to 160 ips/160 ips/160 ips
(VR-N1600U/E(A))
LOCK
REC CONTROL
PTZ/PRESET
SERIAL
FUNCTION
SEARCH
KEY
ALARM CLEAR
REC/STOP
STOP(PB)
PLAY
ꢁꢄ
ꢁꢅ
ꢁꢆ
ꢁꢇ
SKIP
CANCEL ZOOM OUT ZOOM IN
ENTER
T The specifications and appearance of this unit may be
modified for improvement without prior notice.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using NAS
Specifications (continued)
When viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 60 ips/60 ips/30 ips
When not viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 60 ips/0 ips/30 ips
Ⅵ Attachments/Accessories
VR-N900U
Start-up Guide....................................... 1
CD-ROM................................................ 1
Power Cord (2 m) .................................. 1
Rack Mount Bracket .............................. 2
Warranty Card ....................................... 1
Service Information Card....................... 1
Screw (M4
ן 10 mm).............................. 4 Screw (M5
ן 11 mm).............................. 4 Ⅵ General
Allowable Operating Temperature
: 5 I to 40 I
Allowable Storage Temperature
: -20 I to 60 I
Allowable Operating Humidity
: 30 % to 80 %
Power Supply : AC 120 H 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption
Ⅵ Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
: 1.7 A
Mass
: Approx. 8.0 kg
Ⅵ Interface
Network
LAN1
: RJ-45
ן 2 : 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
: USB2.0 A-type (or equivalent)
ן 5 : Up to 1600
ן 1200 LAN2
Serial
VGA Output
Video Input
: NTSC/PAL composite video
75 K (BNC unbalanced)
ן 4 Audio Input
: Analog audio RCA
ן 2 -8 dBs 10 kK (Unbalanced)
420
Audio Output : Analog audio RCA
ן 1 -8 dBs 600 K (Unbalanced)
I/O Terminals : Push terminal
Input
ן 8 Output
ן 5 GND
ן 3 T The specifications and appearance of this unit may be
modified for improvement without prior notice.
Ⅵ Compression Format
Video
: JPEG/MPEG-4 (Network camera)
JPEG (Analog camera)
Audio
: μ-law (64 kbps) A/D 8 bits, Fs = 8 kHz
Ⅵ Recording
HDD Capacity : 250 GB
ן 1 Ⅵ Recording/Displaying live images/Distribution
performance (for JPEG VGA 24 KB)
When viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 120 ips/60 ips/30 ips
When not viewing live images on NVR
: Up to 120 ips/0 ips/82 ips (when NVR
Viewer is not started up)
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LST0728-001C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
